WO2025228175A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents
Communication method and apparatusInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025228175A1 WO2025228175A1 PCT/CN2025/090204 CN2025090204W WO2025228175A1 WO 2025228175 A1 WO2025228175 A1 WO 2025228175A1 CN 2025090204 W CN2025090204 W CN 2025090204W WO 2025228175 A1 WO2025228175 A1 WO 2025228175A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- node
- configuration information
- iab
- reference signal
- information
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
- H04W36/08—Reselecting an access point
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W84/00—Network topologies
- H04W84/02—Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
- H04W84/04—Large scale networks; Deep hierarchical networks
- H04W84/06—Airborne or Satellite Networks
Definitions
- This application relates to the field of communications, and more particularly to communication methods and apparatus.
- 5G Fifth -generation (5G) mobile communication systems impose stringent requirements on various network performance indicators. To meet the performance requirements of 5G systems, a large number of small cells need to be deployed densely, and network coverage needs to be provided for remote areas. However, providing fiber optic backhaul in both scenarios is costly and difficult to implement. Therefore, the cost-effective and convenient integrated access and backhaul (IAB) technology has emerged.
- IAB integrated access and backhaul
- the access link (AL) and backhaul link (BH) adopt wireless transmission schemes, reducing fiber optic deployment and thus meeting the current network requirements for performance indicators such as ultra-high capacity, wider coverage, ultra-high reliability, and ultra-low latency.
- an IAB node provides services to a user equipment (UE)
- UE user equipment
- IAB-DU IAB distributed unit
- IAB-MT IAB mobile termination
- IAB-DUs In mobile IAB (mIAB) scenarios, IAB-DUs will frequently switch the host nodes they access, which will cause frequent release and updates of IAB-DU configuration information, increasing the signaling overhead of instructing IAB-DU configuration information.
- This application provides a communication method and apparatus that can reduce the signaling overhead of indicating configuration information.
- a communication method which can be executed by a first node, wherein the first node can be a device, component (e.g., processor, circuit, chip, or chip system), logic module, or software that implements some or all of the functions of the first node.
- the method includes: receiving first indication information, the first indication information indicating multiple sets of configuration information, the multiple sets of configuration information having different triggering conditions; and performing communication based on the first set of configuration information, the multiple sets of configuration information including the first set of configuration information.
- the integrated IAB distributed unit DU receives multiple sets of configuration information with different trigger conditions configured by its host node (i.e., multiple sets of configuration information indicated by the host node through the first indication information); thus, it can communicate based on one set of configuration information (i.e., the first set of configuration information).
- the triggering conditions corresponding to multiple sets of configuration information can be related to the time when the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the host node (such as reconnecting to the host node or a new host node, or switching to another host node). Therefore, different configuration information will be triggered during each reconnection process of the first node. This ensures that each time the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the host node, one set of configuration information is in effect, allowing the first node to communicate using this set of configuration information. Compared to the scheme where the first node reacquires configuration information each time it connects to the network, this reduces the signaling overhead of instructing the configuration information.
- receiving the first indication information includes: receiving the first indication information from a second node, which is located on the host node, or the second node is located on a descendant node of the host node.
- the configuration information indicates the triggering conditions, and communication is performed based on the first set of configuration information, including: when the triggering conditions corresponding to the first set of configuration information are met, communication is performed based on the first set of configuration information.
- the first set of configuration information is communicated, including: communicating based on the first set of configuration information at a first moment; the communication method further includes: communicating based on the second set of configuration information at a second moment, wherein the multiple sets of configuration information include the second set of configuration information, and the second moment is after the first moment.
- different groups of configuration information are triggered when their corresponding triggering conditions are met (e.g., the first group of configuration information is triggered when its corresponding triggering conditions are met).
- the triggering conditions can be time-related; therefore, it can be considered that different groups of configuration information are triggered at different times. Since the host node sends down multiple groups of configuration information at once, the first node can communicate using different configuration information at different times. Compared to the scheme where the first node indicates each configuration information separately, this reduces the signaling overhead of indicating configuration information.
- the communication method further includes sending a second indication message that indicates the capability information of the first node.
- the first node can report its capability information to the host node, enabling the host node or core network to configure appropriate configuration information for the first node based on this capability information; such as configuring appropriate handover methods and access resources for the first node, thereby improving the effectiveness of mobility management.
- a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a second node, wherein the first node can be a device, component (e.g., processor, circuit, chip, or chip system), logic module, or software that implements some or all of the functions of the first node.
- the method includes: determining first indication information, the first indication information indicating multiple sets of configuration information, the multiple sets of configuration information having different triggering conditions; and sending the first indication information.
- the host node or its descendant node i.e., the second node
- the host node or its descendant node can configure multiple sets of configuration information with different trigger conditions for the first node (i.e., multiple sets of configuration information indicated by the host node through the first indication information); thus, the first node can communicate based on one set of configuration information (i.e., the first set of configuration information).
- the triggering conditions corresponding to multiple sets of configuration information can be related to the time when the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the host node (such as reconnecting to the host node or a new host node, or switching to another host node). Therefore, different configuration information will be triggered during each reconnection process of the first node. This ensures that each time the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the host node, one set of configuration information is in effect, allowing the first node to communicate using this set of configuration information. Compared to the scheme where the first node reacquires configuration information each time it connects to the network, this reduces the signaling overhead of instructing the configuration information.
- determining the first indication information includes: receiving first indication information from the parent node of the second node, wherein the parent node of the second node is located on the host node, or the parent node of the second node is a descendant node of the host node.
- the communication method further includes receiving second indication information, which indicates the capability information of the first node.
- the following possible designs also include:
- the capability information of the first node includes at least one of the following: the type of the first node, which is either a non-ground node or a ground node; ground nodes include stationary nodes or mobile nodes; non-ground nodes include stationary nodes or mobile nodes; whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes; whether the MT in the first node and the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports simultaneous switching; and whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports having the functions of both an IAB node and a host node.
- the first node can report its capability information to the host node, enabling the host node or core network to configure appropriate configuration information for the first node based on this capability information; such as configuring appropriate handover methods and access resources for the first node, thereby improving the effectiveness of mobility management.
- the second instruction information also indicates the effective period of the capability information and/or the effective area of the capability information.
- the first node can also report the effective period and/or effective area of its capability information to the host node, so that the host node or core network can configure appropriate configuration information for the first node according to the effective period and/or effective area of the capability information; such as configuring appropriate triggering periods and/or triggering events for the first node to trigger its different functions, thereby improving the effectiveness of mobility management.
- any one of the multiple sets of configuration information indicates at least one of the following: identifier, trigger condition, coverage area of the first node, information of the first path, address information of the first node, paging area of the first node, configuration information of the first type of reference signal, or configuration information of the second type of reference signal; wherein, the trigger condition is used to trigger the configuration information, the first path is the transmission path between the first node and the host node to which the first node is connected, the configuration information of the first type of reference signal is used to transmit the first reference signal, and the configuration information of the second type of reference signal is used to transmit the second reference signal.
- the triggering conditions indicated by the first set of configuration information may include at least one of the following: the local clock of the first node is within a first time period; the distance between the first node and the reference position is less than or equal to a first threshold; the angle between the first node and the reference position is less than or equal to a second threshold.
- the configuration information indicates the coverage area of the first node, including: the first set of configuration information indicates at least one cell, the cells managed by the first node include at least one cell, and the coverage area of the first node includes the coverage area of at least one cell.
- the configuration information indicates the paging area of the first node, including: the configuration information indicates at least one Tracking Area Code (TAC), and the paging area of the first node includes at least one Tracking Area (TA) corresponding to at least one TAC; and/or, the configuration information indicates at least one Radio Access Area Code (RAC), and the paging area of the first node includes at least one Radio Access Area (RA) corresponding to at least one TAC.
- TAC Tracking Area Code
- RA Radio Access Area
- the period of the first reference signal is the first period
- the period of the second reference signal is either a non-periodic signal or the period of the second reference signal is the second period, which is greater than the first period
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal are synchronization signals/physical layer broadcast channel block (SSB) signals; the first reference signal is mapped to a first type of time-domain location, which satisfies a first period; the second reference signal is mapped to a second type of time-domain location, which is either aperiodic or satisfies a second period, which is greater than the first period.
- SSB physical layer broadcast channel block
- the first node can distinguish between the first reference signal and the second reference signal based on the period of the reference signal, thus avoiding interference between the reference signals.
- the frequency with which terminal devices switch cells is significantly higher than the frequency with which IAB nodes, IAB-MTs, or IAB-DUs (e.g., the first node) switch their access to a host node. Therefore, for the first node, the frequency with which it sends reference signals for cell search of the terminal device is higher than the frequency with which it sends reference signals for searching for the host node; that is, the period of the SSB used for cell search is shorter.
- the first node can use the first reference signal for cell search and the second reference signal for host node search; this saves resources compared to using the same period for both the first and second reference signals (e.g., both using the period of the first reference signal).
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal have different signal types.
- the time-domain location, frequency-domain location, or polarization of the first and second reference signals are different.
- the first reference signal corresponds to a predefined time-domain position; the time-domain position of the second reference signal is variable.
- the first node can send the first reference signal and/or the second reference signal to each other node (i.e., nodes other than the first node); each node can distinguish between the first reference signal and the second reference signal based on the type, period, time domain location, etc. of the reference signal.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal can be used for different services, thereby avoiding interference between the reference signals.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal satisfy a quasi-co-address relationship.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal can satisfy a quasi-co-location relationship, enabling the first node to perform joint channel estimation based on the first reference signal and the second reference signal, thereby improving the accuracy of channel estimation.
- the first type of time-domain location and the second type of time-domain location reuse the same SSB index.
- the first node can indirectly indicate that the first reference signal and the second reference signal satisfy a quasi-co-location relationship based on the first type of time domain location and the second type of time domain location, thereby reducing the signaling overhead of indicating the quasi-co-location relationship.
- the first indication information is carried in any one of the following: Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, F1-Access Point (AP) message, or Xn-AP message.
- RRC Radio Resource Control
- AP F1-Access Point
- Xn-AP message Xn-AP message
- a communication device for implementing various methods.
- This communication device can be a first node in the first aspect; or, it can be a second node in the second aspect.
- the communication device includes modules, units, or means corresponding to the implementation of the methods, which can be implemented in hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
- the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the functions.
- the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module.
- the processing module can be used to implement the processing functions in any of the above aspects and any possible implementations thereof.
- the transceiver module may include a receiving module and a transmitting module, respectively used to implement the receiving function and the transmitting function in any of the above aspects and any possible implementations thereof.
- the transceiver module can consist of transceiver circuits, transceivers, transceivers, or communication interfaces.
- a communication device comprising: a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store computer instructions, which, when executed by the processor, cause the communication device to perform the method described in any aspect.
- the communication device may be a first node in the first aspect or a second node in the second aspect.
- the communication device includes modules, units, or means for implementing the method, which may be implemented in hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
- the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the function.
- a communication device comprising: a processor and a communication interface; the communication interface being used to communicate with a module outside the communication device; the processor being used to execute a computer program or instructions to cause the communication device to perform the method described in any aspect.
- the communication device may be a first node in the first aspect or a second node in the second aspect.
- the communication device includes modules, units, or means corresponding to the implementation of the method, which may be implemented in hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
- the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the functions.
- the interface circuit can be a code/data read/write interface circuit, which receives computer execution instructions (which are stored in memory and may be read directly from memory or may be transmitted through other devices) and transmits them to the processor so that the processor runs the computer execution instructions to perform the methods described in any of the above aspects.
- the communication device also includes a memory for storing computer programs or instructions.
- the processor and memory are integrated together, or the processor and memory are separate.
- the memory is coupled to the processor and is located outside the communication device.
- a sixth aspect provides a communication device, comprising: at least one processor; the processor being configured to execute a computer program or instructions to cause the communication device to perform the method described in any aspect.
- the communication device may be a first node in the first aspect or a second node in the second aspect.
- the communication device includes modules, units, or means for implementing the method, which may be implemented in hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
- the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the function.
- the communication device includes a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data.
- This memory can be integrated with the processor, or it can be independent of the processor.
- the device when it is a chip system, it can be composed of chips or contain chips and other discrete components.
- the communication device provided in any of the fourth to seventh aspects is a chip
- the sending action/function of the communication device can be understood as outputting information
- the receiving action/function of the communication device can be understood as inputting information
- a computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program or instructions that, when executed on a communication device, enable the communication device to perform the method described in any aspect.
- a computer program product containing instructions which, when run on a communication device, enables the communication device to perform the method described in either aspect.
- a communication system including the communication device being either a first node in the first aspect or a second node in the second aspect.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an IAB communication architecture provided in this application.
- FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of another IAB communication architecture provided in this application.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of another IAB communication architecture provided in this application.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of an initial access process provided in this application.
- FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of another initial access process provided in this application.
- Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of a satellite-based communication architecture provided in this application.
- Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication system provided in this application.
- FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of the network equipment in an Open Access Network (O-RAN) provided in this application;
- O-RAN Open Access Network
- FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the functional division of each unit in an O-RAN provided in this application.
- FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a communication method provided in this application.
- FIG 11 is a schematic diagram of another communication system provided in this application.
- Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of a first reference signal and a second reference signal provided in this application;
- Figure 13 is a schematic diagram of another first reference signal and second reference signal provided in this application.
- FIG 14 is a schematic diagram of another communication system provided in this application.
- Figure 15 is a schematic diagram of another first reference signal and second reference signal provided in this application.
- Figure 16 is a flowchart illustrating another communication method provided in this application.
- FIG 17 is a schematic diagram of another communication system provided in this application.
- Figure 18 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in this application.
- Figure 19 is a structural schematic diagram of another communication device provided in this application.
- Figure 20 is a structural schematic diagram of another communication device provided in this application.
- A/B can mean A or B.
- “And/or” in this application is merely a description of the relationship between the related objects, indicating that there can be three relationships.
- a and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone.
- a and B can be singular or plural.
- a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, and c can be single or multiple.
- first and second are used in the embodiments of this application to distinguish identical or similar items with substantially the same function and effect.
- first and second do not limit the quantity or execution order, and the terms “first” and “second” are not necessarily different.
- the terms "exemplary” or “for example” are used to indicate that something is an example, illustration, or description. Any embodiment or design that is described as “exemplary” or “for example” in the embodiments of this application should not be construed as being more preferred or advantageous than other embodiments or design. Specifically, the use of terms such as “exemplary” or “for example” is intended to present the relevant concepts in a specific manner to facilitate understanding.
- “used for indication” can include direct and indirect indication, as well as explicit and implicit indication.
- “a certain indication information is used to indicate A" or “indication information of A”
- it can include whether the indication information directly or indirectly indicates A, but does not necessarily mean that the indication information carries A.
- the information indicated by a certain piece of information is called the information to be indicated.
- there are many ways to indicate the information to be indicated such as, but not limited to, directly indicating the information to be indicated, such as the information to be indicated itself or its index. It can also indirectly indicate the information to be indicated by indicating other information, where there is a correlation between the other information and the information to be indicated.
- the indication of specific information can be achieved by using a pre-agreed (e.g., protocol-defined) arrangement of various information, thereby reducing the indication overhead to some extent.
- the common parts of various information can be identified and indicated uniformly to reduce the indication overhead caused by individually indicating the same information.
- the specific indication method can also be any existing indication method, such as, but not limited to, the above-mentioned indication methods and their various combinations. Specific details of various indication methods can be found in existing technologies and will not be repeated here.
- the required indication method can be selected according to specific needs.
- This application embodiment does not limit the selected indication method. Therefore, the indication methods involved in this application embodiment should be understood to cover various methods that enable the party to be indicated to know the information to be indicated.
- the information to be indicated can be sent as a whole or divided into multiple sub-information and sent separately.
- the sending period or sending time of these sub-information can be the same or different. This application does not limit the specific sending method.
- the sending period or sending time of these sub-information can be predefined, for example, predefined according to the protocol, or configured by the transmitting device by sending configuration information to the receiving device.
- NTN Non-terrestrial networks
- NR new radio
- the initial research on the NR standard protocol was for wireless communication technologies designed for terrestrial cellular network scenarios, capable of providing users with low latency, ultra-reliability, ultra-high speed, and massive connectivity wireless communication services.
- cellular networks cannot achieve seamless global coverage. For example, in areas without terrestrial base stations, such as ocean areas, polar regions, and rainforests, voice and data services cannot be provided to areas covered by cellular networks.
- NTN communications Compared to terrestrial communications, NTN communications offer significant advantages such as global coverage, long-distance transmission, flexible networking, convenient deployment, and freedom from geographical limitations. It has been widely applied in various fields including maritime communications, positioning and navigation, disaster relief, scientific experiments, video broadcasting, and Earth observation. NTN networks can be integrated with terrestrial networks, leveraging their respective strengths to create a seamless, globally integrated sea, land, air, space, and ground communications network, meeting the diverse and ubiquitous service needs of users.
- the NTN can include a low-altitude platform (LAP) subnetwork, a high-altitude platform (HAP) subnetwork, and a satellite communication subnetwork.
- LAP low-altitude platform
- HAP high-altitude platform
- satellite communication subnetwork a satellite communication subnetwork.
- base stations or base station functions are deployed on low-altitude flight platforms (e.g., drones) at an altitude of 0.1km to 1km above the ground to provide coverage for terminals; in a HAP subnetwork, base stations or base station functions are deployed on high-altitude flight platforms (e.g., aircraft) at an altitude of 8km to 50km above the ground to provide coverage for terminals; and in a SATCOM subnetwork, base stations or base station functions are deployed on satellites at an altitude of more than 50km above the ground to provide coverage for terminals. Satellite communication, with its significant advantages such as global coverage, long-distance transmission, flexible networking, convenient deployment, and lack of geographical limitations, has been widely applied in various fields including maritime communication, positioning and navigation, disaster relief, scientific experiments, video broadcasting, and Earth observation.
- satellite communication systems can be divided into geostationary orbit (GEO) satellite communication systems, medium earth orbit (MEO) satellite communication systems, and low earth orbit (LEO) satellite communication systems.
- GEO geostationary orbit
- MEO medium earth orbit
- LEO low earth orbit
- ISL inter-satellite links
- satellite-to-ground links refers to the link used for communication between satellites; it can also be called an inter-satellite link or crosslink.
- ISL refers to the link for communication between satellites.
- a satellite-to-ground link refers to the link used for communication between a satellite and a relay node deployed on the ground.
- the satellite mentioned in the embodiments of this application may be a satellite base station, or may include an orbital receiver or repeater for relaying information, or a network-side device mounted on a satellite.
- IAB Integrated Access and Backhaul
- IAB Internet of Things
- both the access link (AL) and BH in the IAB scenario adopt wireless transmission schemes and NR air interface protocols.
- the access link in the embodiments of this application generally refers to the wireless access link
- the backhaul link generally refers to the wireless backhaul link. This will be explained uniformly here and will not be repeated in the following embodiments.
- IAB nodes can provide wireless access services to terminals and connect to the IAB host (or IAB donor, hereinafter referred to as the host node) via a wireless backhaul link to transmit user service data.
- IAB host or IAB donor, hereinafter referred to as the host node
- IAB nodes connect to the core network via wired links through the IAB host.
- IAB nodes connect to the 5G network core (5G core, 5GC) via wired links through the host node.
- 5G core 5G core
- IAB nodes connect to the evolved packet core (EPC) via evolved NodeBs (eNBs) on the control plane, and to the EPC via the host node and eNBs on the user plane.
- EPC evolved packet core
- eNBs evolved NodeBs
- the IAB network supports multi-hop IAB nodes and multi-connection IAB nodes. Therefore, multiple transmission paths may exist between the terminal served by an IAB node and the host node.
- a single transmission path may include multiple nodes, such as a terminal, one or more IAB nodes, and a host node.
- Each IAB node considers the node providing backhaul services to it as its parent node.
- each IAB node can be considered a child node of its parent node. That is, in this embodiment, the parent node of an IAB node is the node providing backhaul services to that IAB node. Accordingly, that IAB node can be considered a child node of its parent node.
- the upper-level node of the IAB node (e.g., the parent node of the IAB node, the parent node of the parent node of the IAB node, or the parent node of IAB node a (assuming IAB node a is the parent node of the parent node of the IAB node)) is regarded as the ancestor node of the IAB node.
- the lower-level node of the IAB node (e.g., the child node of the IAB node, the child node of the child node of the IAB node, or the child node of IAB node b (assuming IAB node b is the child node of the child node of the IAB node)) is regarded as the descendant node or offspring node of the IAB node.
- IAB node #1 in an IAB standalone (SA) networking scenario, the parent node of IAB node #1 is the host node.
- IAB node #1 is also the parent node of IAB nodes #2 and #3.
- IAB nodes #2 and #3 are both the parent nodes of IAB node #4, and the parent node of IAB node #5 is IAB node #2.
- Data packets from the terminal can be transmitted to the host node via one or more IAB nodes, and then sent by the host node to the mobile gateway device (e.g., a user plane function (UPF) element in a 5G network). After receiving the data packets from the mobile gateway device, the host node can send them to the terminal via one or more IAB nodes.
- the mobile gateway device e.g., a user plane function (UPF) element in a 5G network
- Terminal #2 There are three available paths for data packet transmission between Terminal #2 and the host node: Terminal #2 ⁇ IAB Node #4 ⁇ IAB Node #3 ⁇ IAB Node #1 ⁇ Host Node, Terminal #2 ⁇ IAB Node #4 ⁇ IAB Node #2 ⁇ IAB Node #1 ⁇ Host Node, and Terminal #2 ⁇ IAB Node #5 ⁇ IAB Node #2 ⁇ IAB Node #1 ⁇ Host Node.
- a transmission path between a terminal and the host node can contain one or more IAB nodes.
- Each IAB node needs to maintain a radio backhaul link to its parent node and also maintain radio links with its child nodes. If an IAB node is the node through which a terminal accesses, the link between that IAB node and its child nodes (i.e., the terminal) is a radio access link. If an IAB node is the node that provides backhaul services to other IAB nodes, the link between that IAB node and its child nodes (i.e., the other IAB nodes) is a backhaul link.
- Terminal #1 accesses IAB Node #4 via a wireless access link
- IAB Node #4 accesses IAB Node #3 via a wireless backhaul link
- IAB Node #3 accesses IAB Node #1 via a wireless backhaul link
- IAB Node #1 accesses the host node via a wireless backhaul link.
- the IAB node can be a customer premises equipment (CPE), a residential gateway (RG), or other similar devices.
- CPE customer premises equipment
- RG residential gateway
- the method provided in this application embodiment can also be applied to home access scenarios.
- IAB standalone networking scenario is merely an example.
- IAB scenarios that combine multi-hop and multi-connection there are many other possibilities for IAB standalone networking, such as a host node and an IAB node under another host node forming a dual connection to provide terminal services, etc., which will not be listed here.
- the IAB network also supports non-standalone (NSA) networking; for example, IAB nodes can support 4th generation (4G) and 5G dual connectivity (E-UTRAN NR dual connectivity, EN-DC); and/or, IAB nodes can support 5G and 6G EN-DC.
- NSA non-standalone
- the eNB is the primary parent node of the IAB node, connected to the EPC via the S1 interface for user plane and control plane transmission.
- the host node is the secondary parent node of the IAB node, connected to the EPC via the S1-U interface for user plane transmission.
- the eNB and the host node communicate via the X-2 interface.
- the terminal also supports EN-DC.
- the terminal connects to its primary base station eNB via the LTE Uu interface and connects to its secondary base station IAB node via the NR Uu interface.
- the terminal's secondary base station can also be the host node.
- IAB non-standalone networking scenario is merely an example.
- Multi-hop networking is also supported in IAB non-standalone networking scenarios.
- one or more IAB nodes can be included between the IAB node and the host node. That is, the IAB node can be connected to the host node through a multi-hop wireless backhaul link, etc., which will not be listed here.
- the existing IAB network supports two types of network topologies: tree-based topology and directed acyclic graph (DAG) topology.
- DAG directed acyclic graph
- each IAB node has only one parent node and can have one or more child nodes.
- each IAB node can have one or two parent nodes and can also have one or more child nodes.
- the host node can be a host base station.
- the host node can be simply referred to as an IAB host or DgNB (i.e., donor gNodeB).
- the host node can be a complete entity, or it can be a separate form of a centralized unit (CU) (hereinafter referred to as donor-CU, or simply CU) and a distributed unit (DU) (hereinafter referred to as donor-DU).
- CU centralized unit
- DU distributed unit
- the host node is composed of CU and DU.
- the CU can be considered to be located on the host node, and the DU is also located on the host node.
- the logical interface between the IAB node (e.g., the DU of the IAB node) and the host node (or the CU/DU of the host node) is the F1 interface; the F1 interface can also be called the F1* interface, supporting both the user plane and the control plane.
- the protocol layer of the F1 interface refers to the communication protocol layer on the F1 interface. It is understood that in scenarios evolving after 5G (i.e., next-generation communication networks, such as 5.5G, 6G, etc.), the logical interface between the IAB node and the host node can also be other interfaces besides the F1 interface, and this application embodiment does not impose such limitations.
- the IAB node consists of a mobile terminal (MT) and a DU.
- the IAB node can establish a backhaul connection with at least one parent node of the IAB node through its MT (or, it can also be written as IAB-MT); in this case, IAB-MT can also be considered to be located within the IAB node; the IAB node can also be considered as a terminal or user equipment (UE).
- the DU of the IAB node (or, it can also be called IAB-DU) can provide access services to the terminal or the MT of other IAB nodes. In this case, IAB-DU can also be considered to be located within the IAB node; the IAB node can be considered as a network device.
- the terminal connects to the host node through IAB node #2 and IAB node #1.
- Both IAB node #1 and IAB node #2 consist of a DU and a MT.
- the DU of IAB node #2 provides access services to the terminal.
- the DU of IAB node #1 provides access services to the MT of IAB node #2.
- the DU of the host node provides access services to the MT of IAB node #1.
- a backhaul adaptation protocol (BAP) layer has been introduced into the wireless backhaul link.
- the BAP layer is located above the radio link control (RLC) layer and can be used to implement functions such as packet routing and bearer mapping in the wireless backhaul link.
- RLC radio link control
- MT and DU may share the BAP layer or not. That is, MT and DU each have their own BAP layer.
- Each BAP layer may include one or more BAP layer entities.
- Each BAP layer entity may include a transmitting part and a receiving entity. The transmitting part of the BAP layer entity may also be called the transmitting entity or the receiving entity of the BAP layer entity.
- the initial access in NR may include the following steps:
- the UE performs cell search and selection. Specifically, the UE achieves downlink synchronization with the cell (such as the base station) and selects the cell with the best signal quality to camp on.
- the cell such as the base station
- the UE can perform cell search and obtain synchronization signals, which include a primary synchronization signal (PSS) and a secondary synchronization signal (SSS); thereby identifying cells and synchronizing timing with them based on different signals, that is, achieving downlink synchronization.
- PSS primary synchronization signal
- SSS secondary synchronization signal
- the UE initiates random access to the base station (i.e., the base station to which the best cell selected by the UE belongs). Specifically, the UE can establish uplink synchronization with the cell and obtain uplink resources through the random access procedure.
- the base station i.e., the base station to which the best cell selected by the UE belongs.
- the UE can send a preamble during the random access process.
- the base station to which the cell belongs can adjust its clock according to the preamble to align the transmission timing of the UE with that of the base station, thus achieving uplink synchronization.
- the UE establishes an RRC connection with the base station.
- a UE can send a Radio Resource Control (RRC) Setup Request message to a base station; after receiving the RRC Setup Request message, the base station can respond to the UE with an RRC Setup message.
- RRC Radio Resource Control
- the UE establishes the initial context with the base station. Alternatively, it can be considered as the UE establishing context information with the core network (such as the 5G core network (5th generation core, 5GC)) through the base station.
- the core network such as the 5G core network (5th generation core, 5GC)
- the base station when making decisions on various events, the base station needs to rely on the context information of the UE to determine the most appropriate decision result; therefore, the context information of the UE can be considered as being used to improve the accuracy of the base station's decision results.
- the following steps can also be performed:
- the UE establishes a Protocol Data Unit (PDU) session with the base station.
- PDU Protocol Data Unit
- the PDU session provides a PDU connection between the UE and the data network (DN), meaning it supports PDU exchange between the UE and the DN.
- DN data network
- the IAB node access network can include the IAB node's MT (hereinafter referred to as IAB-MT) access network and the IAB node's DU (hereinafter referred to as IAB-DU) access network.
- IAB-MT the IAB node's MT
- IAB-DU the IAB node's DU
- the initial access in the IAB network can include the following steps:
- IAB-MT can perform host node search and selection (such as selecting the host node with the best signal quality), and then initiate random access to the selected host node. Furthermore, it can establish an RRC connection with the host node to achieve access to the core network (such as 5GC).
- core network such as 5GC
- the IAB node can directly connect to the host node. In this case, after the IAB node accesses the network, the host node becomes the parent node of the IAB node. If the synchronization signal obtained by the IAB-MT comes from an IAB node associated with the host node (as shown by IAB node ' in Figure 5), the IAB node can connect to the host node through IAB node '. In this case, after the IAB node accesses the network, IAB node ' becomes the parent node of the IAB node.
- An IAB node associated with a host node can be understood as either a node directly or indirectly connected to the host node, or a descendant node of the host node. For example, if an IAB node is connected to the host node through an IAB node', then it can be considered that the IAB node' is directly connected to the host node, or indirectly connected. In this case, the IAB' node is a child node of the host node, meaning it is a descendant node of the host node.
- the implementation process of the IAB-MT access network is similar to the initial access process in NR mentioned above. Please refer to the relevant descriptions above for details, which will not be repeated here.
- the selection of a host node by the IAB-MT can also be understood as the selection of a CU by the IAB-MT.
- the CU selected by the IAB-MT can also be called the RRC-terminating IAB-dornor-CU.
- this CU can serve the IAB-MT.
- the IAB node can also indicate its characteristics to the network (such as the core network) through the RRC Setup Complete message, such as indicating to the network that it is an IAB node; so that the network can perform identity authentication based on the characteristics.
- the host node establishes a communication channel with the IAB node.
- the host node can establish one or more backhaul RLC channels on the transmission path between the host node and the IAB node.
- BH RLC channels are established on the intermediate nodes between the host node and the IAB node.
- the host node can also update the BAP layer configuration, BAP path identifier (ID), and routing table updates of intermediate nodes.
- the BAP path ID indicates the routing path that a packet should follow to reach its destination node.
- IAB-DU establishes an F1 interface based on the communication channel.
- the IAB-DU can communicate with the host node via the F1 interface, or in other words, it can connect to the network via the F1 interface. Therefore, step 3) can also be understood as the IAB-DU accessing the network. Furthermore, the IAB-DU can also provide services to the UE.
- an IAB-DU During the establishment of an IAB-DU, the original configuration information is typically released, and new configuration information is acquired; communication is then established based on this new configuration information. Therefore, in mobile IAB (mIAB) scenarios, this triggers frequent switching of the host node to which the IAB-DU connects, leading to frequent release and updates of the IAB-DU's configuration information, thus increasing signaling overhead.
- mIAB mobile IAB
- the communication method and apparatus allow the IAB-DU (i.e., the first node) to receive multiple sets of configuration information with different trigger conditions configured by its host node (i.e., multiple sets of configuration information indicated by the host node through the first indication information); thereby, communication can be performed based on one set of configuration information (i.e., the first set of configuration information) among the multiple sets of configuration information.
- the triggering conditions corresponding to multiple sets of configuration information can be related to the time when the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the host node (such as reconnecting to the host node or a new host node, or switching to another host node). Therefore, different configuration information will be triggered during each reconnection process of the first node. This ensures that each time the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the host node, one set of configuration information is in effect, allowing the first node to communicate using this set of configuration information. Compared to the scheme where the first node reacquires configuration information each time it connects to the network, this reduces the signaling overhead of instructing the configuration information.
- HAPS high-altitude platform station
- UAV Unmanned Aerial Vehicle
- ICAN integrated communication and navigation
- GNSS global navigation satellite systems
- LEO ultra-dense low-Earth orbit Satellite communication systems.
- Satellite communication systems can be integrated with traditional mobile communication systems.
- the mobile communication system can be a cellular system related to the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP), such as the 4th generation (4G) long term evolution (LTE) system, the worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) communication system, the evolved LTE system (LTE-Advanced, LTE-A) system, the 5G NR system, the vehicle to everything (V2X) system, the LTE and NR hybrid networking system, or the device-to-device (D2D) system, the machine-to-machine (M2M) communication system, the Internet of Things (IoT), and other next-generation communication systems, such as the 6th generation (6G) communication system.
- 3GPP 3rd generation partnership project
- 4G long term evolution
- WiMAX worldwide interoperability for microwave access
- LTE-A evolved LTE system
- LTE-A LTE-Advanced
- 5G NR the vehicle to everything
- V2X vehicle to everything
- LTE and NR hybrid networking system or the device-to-
- the communication system may be a non-3GPP communication system, such as an open radio access network (O-RAN or ORAN), a cloud radio access network (CRAN), or a communication system that integrates multiple of the above communication systems.
- O-RAN open radio access network
- CRAN cloud radio access network
- This application does not impose any restrictions on this.
- the communication systems and scenarios applicable to this application mentioned above are merely illustrative examples.
- the communication systems and scenarios applicable to this application are not limited thereto.
- the communication systems and scenarios provided in this application do not impose any limitations on the solutions of this application. This is hereby stated uniformly and will not be repeated below.
- the communication system may include at least one first node and at least one second node. Both the first and second nodes are located within a node of the IAB network, and the second node is capable of providing services to the first node. Alternatively, the second node may be considered a candidate parent node of the first node.
- the first node can be located on an IAB node; correspondingly, the second node can also be located on an IAB node, or the second node can be located on the host node.
- the first node can be an IAB-DU
- the second node can be an IAB-DU of the candidate parent node of the first node, or the second node can be an IAB dornor-DU.
- the communication between the first node and the second node can be understood as follows: the first node communicates with the second node through the MT of its IAB node (i.e., the IAB-MT associated with the first node); correspondingly, the second node can also communicate with the first node through the MT.
- the IAB node i.e., the IAB-MT associated with the first node
- the second node can also communicate with the first node through the MT.
- each node in the IAB network can serve at least one terminal device. Therefore, the node where the first node is located and the node where the second node is located can also serve at least one terminal device respectively, so the first node and the second node are also considered to be network devices.
- both the first and second nodes are deployed on the NTN.
- the communication system can also be considered to be applied in an NTN scenario.
- the first and second nodes can be deployed on non-ground platforms, such as low-altitude platforms (e.g., drones), high-altitude platforms (e.g., aircraft), or satellites.
- non-ground platforms such as low-altitude platforms (e.g., drones), high-altitude platforms (e.g., aircraft), or satellites.
- the communication system may also include an NTN gateway (or gateway station).
- the NTN gateway is deployed on the ground.
- the NTN gateway can communicate with the satellite, and the link between the satellite and the NTN gateway can be called a feeder link.
- the NTN gateway when the satellite acts as a wireless relay node, or in other words, the satellite has relay forwarding capabilities, the NTN gateway has the functions of a base station or some of the functions of a base station. In this case, the NTN gateway can function as a base station. Alternatively, the NTN gateway can be deployed separately from the base station; that is, in addition to the NTN gateway, the communication system also includes a base station. Figure 6 illustrates this using the example of deploying the NTN gateway and base station separately.
- a satellite when a satellite can perform some or all of the functions of a base station, and has data processing capabilities, it can be used as a base station.
- the NTN gateway and the satellite can transmit user plane data of the terminal equipment through the satellite radio interface (SRI).
- SRI satellite radio interface
- a satellite can have the DU processing function of a base station, or in other words, a satellite can act as a DU.
- the CU processing function of the base station can be deployed on the ground, and the CU and DU communicate with each other via the F1 interface through an NTN gateway.
- NG refers to the interface between the base station and the core network.
- Uu refers to the interface between the base station and the terminal equipment.
- Xn refers to the interface between base stations. It is understood that as the communication system evolves, the names of the interfaces between the base station and the core network, between the base station and the terminal equipment, and between base stations may also change, and this application does not specifically limit them.
- a satellite when a satellite acts as a wireless relay node with relay forwarding capabilities, it can be considered to be operating in transparent mode.
- a satellite When a satellite has data processing capabilities and can perform some or all of the functions of a base station, it can be considered to be operating in regenerative mode.
- it may support only transparent mode, only regenerative mode, or both transparent and regenerative modes, and it may be able to switch between transparent and regenerative modes.
- the first node can be deployed on the NTN, and the second node can be deployed on the ground.
- the communication system can also be considered to be applied to a scenario where NTN and terrestrial networks are integrated.
- the implementation of the first node deployed on the NTN can be found in the relevant description of the above embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
- the second node can be deployed as a terrestrial base station, or the second node can be a terrestrial base station.
- satellites can provide communication, navigation, and positioning services to terminal devices using multiple beams.
- a satellite can use multiple beams to cover its service area.
- different beams can communicate using one or more of time-division multiplexing, frequency-division multiplexing, space-division multiplexing, and polarization multiplexing.
- beaming can be represented as a spatial domain filter, spatial filter, spatial domain parameter, spatial parameter, spatial domain setting, spatial setting, or quasi-colocation (QCL) information, QCL assumption, QCL indication, etc.
- Beaming can be indicated through transmission configuration indication (TCI) state parameters or spatial relation parameters. Therefore, in this application, beaming can be replaced by spatial domain filter, spatial filter, spatial parameter, spatial parameter, spatial setting, spatial setting, QCL information, QCL assumption, QCL indication, TCI-state, spatial relation, etc. These terms are also equivalent to each other. Beaming in this application can also be replaced with other beaming terms, and this application does not limit this.
- satellite #1 can serve terminal devices #1 and #2
- satellite #2 can serve terminal device #3
- satellite #3 can serve terminal device #4.
- the satellites can communicate wirelessly with the terminal devices through broadcast communication signals and navigation signals, and they can also communicate wirelessly with the NTN gateway.
- Satellites can connect to base stations or NTN gateways to enable communication between terminal devices and the network.
- satellite #1 can connect to base station #1 to enable communication between base station #1 and terminal device #1 (and/or terminal device #2); alternatively, satellite #1 can connect to the NTN gateway via satellite #2 or satellite #3 to enable communication between the NTN gateway and terminal device #1 (and/or terminal device #2); or satellite #1 can connect to base station #2 via satellite #2 to enable communication between base station #2 and terminal device #1 (and/or terminal device #2).
- the communication links between satellites #1, #2, and #3 are ISLs (Independent Links).
- Base station #1, base station #2, and the NTN gateway can all receive information from the network and send information to the network. In other words, communication between the terminal device and the base station or NTN gateway can also be considered as communication between the terminal device and the network.
- satellite #2 can access base station #2 to enable communication between base station #2 and terminal device #3; or, satellite #2 can access the NTN gateway via satellite #3 to enable communication between the NTN gateway and terminal device #3; or, satellite #2 can access base station #1 via satellite #1 to enable communication between base station #1 and terminal device #3.
- Satellite #3 can access the NTN gateway to enable communication between the NTN gateway and terminal device #4; or, satellite #3 can access base station #2 to enable communication between base station #2 and terminal device #4; or, satellite #3 can access base station #1 via satellite #2 and satellite #1 to enable communication between base station #1 and terminal device #3.
- Terminal device #1 (and/or Terminal device #2) ⁇ Satellite #1 ⁇ Base station #1; Satellite #1 can act as an IAB node, and Base station #1 can act as a host node; in this case, the first node can be deployed on satellite #1, and the second node can be deployed on base station #1.
- Terminal device #1 (and/or Terminal device #2) ⁇ Satellite #1 ⁇ Satellite #2 ⁇ Base station #2; Both satellite #1 and satellite #2 can act as IAB nodes, and base station #2 can act as a host node; in this case, the first node can be deployed on satellite #1, and the second node can be deployed on satellite #2.
- Terminal device #1 (and/or Terminal device #2) ⁇ Satellite #1 ⁇ Satellite #2 ⁇ Satellite #3 ⁇ NTN gateway; Both satellite #1 and satellite #2 can act as IAB nodes, and satellite #3 can act as a host node; in this case, the first node can be deployed on satellite #1, and correspondingly, the second node can be deployed on satellite #2.
- Terminal Device #3 ⁇ Satellite #2 ⁇ Base Station #2; Satellite #2 can act as an IAB node, and Base Station #2 can act as a host node; in this case, the first node can be deployed on Satellite #2, and the second node can be deployed on Base Station #2.
- Terminal Device #3 ⁇ Satellite #2 ⁇ Satellite #1 ⁇ Base Station #1; Both Satellite #1 and Satellite #2 can act as IAB nodes, and Base Station #1 can act as a host node; in this case, the first node can be deployed on Satellite #2, and the second node can be deployed on Satellite #1.
- Terminal Device #3 ⁇ Satellite #2 ⁇ Satellite #3 ⁇ NTN Gateway
- Satellite #2 can act as an IAB node
- Satellite #3 can act as a host node; in this case, the first node can be deployed on Satellite #2, and correspondingly, the second node can be deployed on Satellite #3.
- Terminal device #4 ⁇ Satellite #3 ⁇ Base station #2; Satellite #3 can act as an IAB node, and Base station #2 can act as a host node; in this case, the first node can be deployed on satellite #3, and the second node can be deployed on base station #2.
- satellites in the architecture described in Figures 6 and 7 above can be replaced by non-ground payloads on other flight platforms such as drones and airplanes.
- the network device in this application embodiment is a device that connects a terminal device to a wireless network.
- the network device can be a node in a radio access network, also known as a base station or a radio access network (RAN) node (or device).
- the network device may include an evolved Node B (NodeB, eNB, or e-NodeB) in an LTE or LTE-A system, such as a traditional macro base station (eNB) or a micro base station (eNB) in a heterogeneous network scenario.
- eNB evolved Node B
- eNB micro base station
- gNB next-generation node B
- the access network device can act as a Layer 1 (L1) relay, a base station, a DU, or an IAB node.
- the network device can be a device that implements base station functions in IoT, such as V2X, D2D, or machine-to-machine (M2M) devices that implement base station functions.
- IoT Layer 1
- M2M machine-to-machine
- it can include in-vehicle devices or wearable devices.
- it can include network devices in 5G networks or public land mobile networks (PLMNs) that evolve from 5G.
- PLMNs public land mobile networks
- the base station in this application embodiment may include various forms of base stations, such as: macro base station, micro base station (also known as small station), relay station, access point, home base station, TRP, transmission point (TP), mobile switching center, etc. This application embodiment does not specifically limit these.
- the network device in this application embodiment can also be a module or unit capable of implementing some functions of a base station.
- the network device can be a CU, DU, CU-control plane (CP), CU-user plane (UP), or radio unit (RU), etc.
- the CU and DU can be set separately, or they can be included in the same network element (such as BBU), that is, the BBU can include at least one CU and at least one DU.
- the RU can be included in radio equipment or radio unit; for example, it can be included in a remote radio unit (RRU), an active antenna unit (AAU), or a remote radio head (RRH).
- RRU remote radio unit
- AAU active antenna unit
- RRH remote radio head
- CU or CU-CP and CU-UP
- DU or RU
- RU may have different names, but those skilled in the art will understand their meaning.
- CU can also be called open (O)-CU
- DU can also be called O-DU
- CU-CP can also be called O-CU-CP
- CU-UP can also be called O-CU-UP
- RU can also be called O-RU.
- this application uses CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU, and RU as examples.
- Any of the units among CU (or CU-CP, CU-UP), DU, and RU in this application can be implemented through software modules, hardware modules, or a combination of software modules and hardware modules.
- the CU and DU are included in the same BBU, and the RU is included in the radio frequency unit.
- the access network device shown in Figure 8(a) can communicate with the core network (CN) via a BH link, and the access network device can also communicate with the terminal device via an air interface.
- the BBU in the access network device communicates with the CN via a BH link
- the RU in the access network device communicates with at least one terminal device via an air interface.
- the BBU can communicate with at least one RU via a fronthaul link; the BBU and RU may or may not be co-located.
- This communication system includes a RAN intelligent controller (RIC).
- the RIC includes a near-real-time RIC (near-RT RIC) and a non-real-time RIC (non-RT RIC).
- the near-real-time RIC is used for model training and inference. For example, it is used to train an artificial intelligence (AI) model and then use that AI model for inference.
- the near-real-time RIC can obtain network-side and/or terminal-side information from access network devices (e.g., CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU, and/or RU) and/or terminal devices. This information can be used as training data or inference data.
- the near real-time RIC can deliver inference results to access network devices and/or terminal devices.
- inference results can be exchanged between the CU and DU, and/or between the DU and RU.
- the near real-time RIC delivers inference results to the DU, and the DU sends them to the RU. This is used to achieve near real-time intelligent management of the RAN. Through data collection and related operations on the E2 interface, near real-time control and optimization of O-RAN modules and resources are achieved.
- a non-real-time RIC is used for model training and inference. For instance, it can be used to train an AI model and then use that model for inference.
- the non-real-time RIC can obtain network-side and/or terminal-side information from RAN nodes (e.g., CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU, and/or RU) and/or terminal devices. This information can be used as training data or inference data, and the inference results can be delivered to the access network devices and/or terminal devices.
- inference results can be exchanged between CUs and DUs, and/or between DUs and RUs; for example, the non-real-time RIC delivers the inference results to the DU, which then forwards them to the RU.
- near real-time RIC and non-real-time RIC can also be set up as separate network elements.
- near real-time RICs and non-real-time RICs can also be part of other devices.
- near real-time RICs can be set in access network devices (e.g., CU, DU), while non-real-time RICs can be set in operations and maintenance (OAM), cloud servers, CN, or other access network devices.
- access network devices e.g., CU, DU
- OAM operations and maintenance
- cloud servers e.g., CN, or other access network devices.
- the O-RAN central unit is used to implement the radio resource control (RRC) layer, packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer, and other control functions in the 3GPP standard.
- RRC radio resource control
- PDCP packet data convergence protocol
- SDAP service data adaptation protocol
- O-RAN Central Unit Control Plane Similar to the CU-CP in the NR system, it is used to implement the functions of the RRC layer and the control plane functions of the PDCP layer. It is part of the O-CU.
- O-RAN Central Unit User Plane Similar to the CU-UP in the NR system, it is used to implement the functions of the SDAP layer and the user plane functions of the PDCP layer. It is part of the O-CU.
- O-RAN distributed unit Based on low-layer function segmentation, it is used to implement the RLC layer, media access control (MAC) layer, and higher physical layer (Higher PHY) in the 3GPP standard.
- the higher physical layer functions include at least one of the following: forward error correction (FEC) encoding/decoding, scrambling/descrambling, or modulation/demodulation.
- FEC forward error correction
- the O-RAN radio unit is based on low-layer function partitioning and is used to implement the lower physical layer (PHY) functions and radio frequency (RF) functions in the 3GPP standard.
- the PHY functions include at least one of the following: Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)/Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (iFFT) transformation, digital beamforming, or extraction and filtering of the Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH). It is similar to the TRP or RRH in 3GPP, but includes low-PHY functions such as FFT/iFFT or PHY extraction.
- the terminal device in this application embodiment can be a user-side device used to implement wireless communication functions, such as a terminal or a chip that can be used in the terminal.
- the terminal can be a UE, MT, access terminal, satellite terminal, terminal unit, terminal station, mobile station (MS), mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, wireless communication device, terminal agent, or terminal apparatus in a 5G network or a PLMN evolved from 5G.
- Access terminals can be cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, smartphones (such as mobile phones), personal digital assistants (PDAs), handheld devices with wireless communication capabilities, computing devices or other processing devices connected to a wireless modem, mobile internet devices (MIDs), in-vehicle devices (e.g., cars, bicycles, electric vehicles, airplanes, ships, trains, high-speed trains, etc.) or wearable devices (e.g., smartwatches, smart bracelets, pedometers, smart glasses, etc.), virtual reality (VR) terminal devices, augmented reality (AR) terminal devices, point-of-sale (POS) machines, customer-premises equipment (CPE), and light user equipment (light Wireless terminals include: UE (User Equipment), reduced capability UE (REDCAP UE), smart home devices (e.g., refrigerators, televisions, air conditioners, electricity meters), wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in tele
- Terminal devices can also be vehicle-mounted devices, such as vehicle-mounted devices, in-vehicle modules, in-vehicle chips, on-board units (OBUs), or telematics boxes (T-BOXs); alternatively, terminal devices can be terminals with communication functions in IoT, such as devices that function as terminals in V2X (e.g., vehicle-to-everything devices), devices that function as terminals in D2D communication, or devices that function as terminals in M2M communication. Terminals can be mobile or fixed.
- the embodiments of this application do not limit the form of the terminal device.
- the device used to implement the functions of the terminal device can be the terminal device itself, or it can be a device that supports the terminal device in implementing the functions, such as a chip system.
- the device can be installed in the terminal device or used in conjunction with the terminal device.
- the chip system can be composed of chips, or it can include chips and other discrete devices. All or part of the functions of the terminal device in this application can also be implemented by software functions running on hardware, or by virtualization functions instantiated on a platform (such as a cloud platform).
- network devices and terminal devices, network devices and network devices, or terminal devices and terminal devices can communicate through licensed spectrum, or through unlicensed spectrum, or simultaneously through both licensed and unlicensed spectrum.
- communication between network devices and terminal devices, between network devices, or between terminal devices can be conducted using spectrum below 6 GHz, or using spectrum above 6 GHz, or simultaneously using spectrum below 6 GHz and spectrum above 6 GHz.
- the embodiments of this application do not limit the spectrum resources used for wireless communication.
- the first node or the second node may execute some or all of the steps in the embodiments of this application. These steps or operations are merely examples, and the embodiments of this application may also execute other operations or variations thereof. Furthermore, the steps may be executed in different orders as presented in the embodiments of this application, and it is not necessary to execute all the operations in the embodiments of this application.
- the communication method may include the following steps S1001 to S1002:
- the second node sends a first indication message to the first node; correspondingly, the first node receives the first indication message from the second node.
- the first indication message indicates multiple sets of configuration information, each set used for different triggering conditions of the first node.
- the second node can be located on the host node; or, the second node can be located on the IAB node, in which case the second node can be a descendant node of the host node. That is, the first node can communicate with the host node through the second node.
- the second node (or the host node) can send configuration information to the first node; that is, the above step S1001 is executed after the first node connects to the second node.
- the first node accessing the second node can be understood as the first node accessing the host node, or in other words, the first node accessing the network.
- the first node accessing the second node can be understood as the first node accessing the host node through the second node, or in other words, the first node accessing the network through the second node.
- the implementation of the first node accessing the second node can refer to the relevant description of the IAB-DU access network mentioned above, and will not be repeated here.
- the second node can send the first indication information to the first node via broadcast or multicast. That is, if the second node is located at the host node or IAB node, the second node can send the first indication information to the first node via broadcast or multicast.
- the second node can obtain the first indication information from the host node.
- the host node (such as the DU of the host node) can send the first indication information via unicast.
- the first indication information can be carried in any of the following: an RRC message, an F1-AP message, or an Xn-AP message.
- the host node when the second node is a descendant node of the host node (i.e., the second node is located on an IAB node), the host node (such as the host node's DU) can send the first indication information to its child node via unicast. If the second node is located on that child node, it means the host node is sending the first indication information to the IAB node where the second node is located. If the second node is not located on that child node, after receiving the first indication information, the child node can send the first indication information to its child nodes, further enabling the second node to receive the first indication information.
- the host node such as the host node's DU
- the first node can be a ground node or a non-ground node; similarly, the second node can also be a ground node or a non-ground node; wherein, ground nodes include stationary nodes or mobile nodes, and non-ground nodes include stationary nodes or mobile nodes.
- a ground node refers to a node deployed on the ground; correspondingly, a non-ground node refers to a node deployed on a location other than the ground.
- a non-ground node can be deployed on a satellite, a low-altitude platform (such as a drone), or a high-altitude platform (such as an aircraft).
- a stationary node is a node that remains stationary relative to the ground. Therefore, a ground node is a stationary node, meaning a node deployed on the ground that remains stationary relative to the ground; a non-ground node is a stationary node, meaning a node deployed off the ground that remains stationary relative to the ground.
- a mobile node is a node that moves relative to the ground. Therefore, a ground node is a mobile node, which is a node deployed on the ground and moving relative to the ground (e.g., a node deployed in a moving vehicle); a non-ground node is a mobile node, which is a node deployed off the ground and moving relative to the ground.
- IAB nodes #1 to #3 are all non-terrestrial nodes, as are host nodes A and B.
- the first node can be located at IAB node #3; if the host node is host node A, the second node can be located at IAB node #2 or host node A; that is, the first node can access host node A through IAB node #2. If the host node is host node B, the second node can be located at IAB node #1 or host node B; that is, the first node can access host node B through IAB node #1.
- host nodes A and B can communicate with the core network.
- any one of IAB nodes #1 to #3 can provide access services for terminal devices, and/or, any one of IAB nodes #1 to #3 can provide backhaul services for its descendant nodes.
- IAB nodes #1 to #5 are all non-terrestrial nodes, while host node A and host node B are both terrestrial nodes.
- the first node can be located at IAB node #3. If the host node is host node A, the second node can be located at any of IAB nodes #2, #4, or host node A; that is, the first node can access host node A through IAB nodes #2 and #4. If the host node is host node B, the second node can be located at any of IAB nodes #1, #5, or host node B; that is, the first node can access host node B through IAB nodes #1 and #5. Furthermore, host node A and host node B can communicate with the core network. In addition, any of IAB nodes #1 to #5 can provide access services for terminal devices, and/or, any of IAB nodes #1 to #5 can provide backhaul services for the descendant nodes of that IAB node.
- the first node communicates according to the first set of configuration information.
- the first set of configuration information is included in the multiple sets of configuration information.
- the first set of configuration information is the configuration information that is triggered for the first time among multiple sets of configuration information. For instance, if the triggering condition is related to the process of the first node reconnecting to the network after the first node connects to the second node, the first trigger refers to the configuration information that takes effect during the first network access process after the first node connects to the second node.
- the first node communicates according to the first set of configuration information, including: the first node provides services to terminal devices within its coverage area according to the first set of configuration information.
- the first node communicates based on the first set of configuration information, including: communicating based on the first set of configuration information at a first moment; the communication method further includes: communicating based on the second set of configuration information at a second moment, wherein the multiple sets of configuration information include the second set of configuration information, and the second moment is after the first moment.
- the first node can communicate using different configuration information at different times. For instance, the first node can communicate based on configuration information #1 at time #1, based on configuration information #2 at time #2, and based on configuration information #3 at time #3.
- time #1, time #2, and time #3 are different.
- the communication method provided in this application embodiment allows the IAB-DU (i.e., the first node) to receive multiple sets of configuration information with different trigger conditions configured by its host node (i.e., multiple sets of configuration information indicated by the host node through the first indication information); thereby, it can communicate based on one set of configuration information (i.e., the first set of configuration information) among the multiple sets of configuration information.
- the triggering conditions corresponding to multiple sets of configuration information can be related to the time when the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the host node (such as reconnecting to the host node or a new host node, or switching to another host node). Therefore, different configuration information will be triggered during each reconnection process of the first node. This ensures that during each reconnection process after connecting to the host node, one set of configuration information from multiple sets becomes effective, allowing the first node to communicate using this set of configuration information. Compared to the scheme where the first node re-acquires configuration information each time it connects to the network, this reduces the signaling overhead of instructing the configuration information.
- any one of the multiple sets of configuration information indicates at least one of the following: identifier, triggering condition, coverage area of the first node, information of the first path, address information of the first node, paging area of the first node, configuration information of the first type of reference signal, or configuration information of the second type of reference signal.
- the triggering condition is used to trigger the configuration information
- the first path is the transmission path between the first node and the host node that the first node reconnects to
- the first type of reference signal configuration information is used to transmit the first reference signal
- the second type of reference signal configuration information is used to transmit the second reference signal.
- the identifiers indicated by the configuration information are used to identify different configuration information.
- the first node can communicate according to the configuration information when the triggering condition is met.
- the triggering condition indicated by the first set of configuration information is a first condition
- communicating according to the first set of configuration information includes: communicating according to the first set of configuration information when the first condition is met.
- the triggering condition indicated by the first set of configuration information can also be called the triggering condition corresponding to the first set of configuration information. Therefore, communicating according to the first set of configuration information when the first condition is met can also be replaced by: communicating according to the first set of configuration information when the triggering condition corresponding to the first set of configuration information is met.
- the triggering condition can include the following three possible implementation methods:
- the triggering condition is time-based. That is, multiple sets of configuration information can be triggered based on different times.
- different configuration information is triggered when the local clock of the first node is in different time periods (i.e., the configuration information corresponding to the time period in which the local clock of the first node is located takes effect).
- the triggering condition indicated by the first set of configuration information can be that the local clock of the first node is in the first time period; similarly, the triggering condition indicated by the second set of configuration information can be that the local clock of the first node is in the second time period; and the triggering condition indicated by the third set of configuration information can be that the local clock of the first node is in the third time period.
- the first time period, the second time period, and the third time period are all different.
- the time period corresponding to the configuration information (i.e. the time period used to trigger the configuration information, such as the first time period corresponding to the first set of configuration information) may be related to the time when the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the second node.
- the first node will switch to different host nodes during its movement; this switching process can usually be considered as the process of accessing the network. Therefore, after the first node accesses the second node, switching to different new host nodes during its movement can also be considered as the first node re-accessing the network.
- the host node or core network can determine the time for the first node to reconnect to the network based on the movement speed and direction of movement of the first node and each node in the IAB network; for example, after the first node reconnects to the second node, it may reconnect to the network multiple times.
- the host node or core network can determine the times for the first node to reconnect to the network multiple times, and further, based on these times, determine different time periods. For example, each time period includes the time of one of the multiple reconnections by the first node. This allows different time periods to serve as trigger conditions for different sets of configuration information within multiple sets of configuration information.
- the direction and speed of movement of the first node can be communicated to the host node by the first node through the MT of its affiliated IAB node.
- the MT's access request information such as the direction and speed of movement of the first node can be carried in message 1 (Msg 1) or MsgA in the random access procedure.
- the host node or core network can determine the first time period based on time #1 (e.g., the first time period includes time #1). Similarly, it can determine the second time period based on time #2 and the third time period based on time #3.
- the first set of configuration information takes effect when the local clock of the first node is within the first time period; the second set of configuration information takes effect when the local clock of the first node is within the second time period; and the third set of configuration information takes effect when the local clock of the first node is within the third time period.
- the first node can use different configuration information for communication based on its local clock.
- the effective period of the configuration information can be related to the time when the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the second node.
- the effective period of the configuration information can include the time when the first node reconnects to the network, allowing the configuration information to take effect during the process of the first node reconnecting to the network. Compared to the scheme where the first node reacquires the configuration information every time it reconnects to the network, this reduces the signaling overhead of instructing the configuration information.
- the triggering condition is location-based. That is, multiple sets of configuration information can be triggered based on different reference positions and threshold positions.
- each set of configuration information in the multiple sets of configuration information corresponds to a reference position and a threshold. Therefore, when the distance between the position of the first node and the reference position corresponding to a certain configuration information is less than or equal to the threshold corresponding to that configuration information, and/or when the angle between the position of the first node and the reference position corresponding to a certain configuration information is less than or equal to the threshold corresponding to that configuration information, the configuration information is triggered (i.e., the configuration information takes effect).
- the triggering condition of the first set of configuration information when the triggering condition of the first set of configuration information is related to the distance between the first node and the reference position, the triggering condition of the first set of configuration information can be represented by the reference position and the first threshold; when the triggering condition of the first set of configuration information is related to the angle between the first node and the reference position, the triggering condition of the first set of configuration information can be represented by the reference position and the second threshold.
- the thresholds corresponding to multiple sets of configuration information can be the same or different.
- the threshold can be pre-configured, or it can be a default value; in this case, the configuration information can indicate a reference position.
- the threshold can be indicated by the configuration information, in which case the configuration information can indicate both the reference position and the threshold. This allows the first node to determine the triggering condition of the configuration information based on the reference position and the threshold.
- the reference position and threshold corresponding to the configuration information can be related to the position of the first node during the process of reconnecting to the network.
- the host node or core network can determine the location of the first node when it reconnects to the network based on the movement speed and direction of movement of the first node and each node in the IAB network; for example, after the first node reconnects to the second node, it reconnects to the network multiple times.
- the host node or core network can determine the location of the first node when it reconnects to the network multiple times, and further, based on the location of the first node when it reconnects to the network multiple times, determine different reference locations. For example, the distance or angle between each reference location and the location of the first node during one of its multiple reconnections to the network is less than or equal to a threshold. This allows different reference locations to be used to determine the triggering conditions for different sets of configuration information in multiple sets of configuration information.
- the implementation of the first node reconnecting to the network and the implementation of the host node or core network obtaining the first node's direction of movement and speed of movement, can be referred to the relevant description in one of the possible implementations above, and will not be repeated here.
- the triggering condition for the first set of configuration information can be determined based on reference position #1 and threshold #1 (such as the first threshold or the second threshold).
- the triggering condition for the second set of configuration information can be determined based on reference position #2 and threshold #2.
- the triggering condition for the third set of configuration information can be determined based on reference position #3 and threshold #3. Taking the example of the first node switching to a new host node at position #1, position #2, and position #3 respectively, the host node or core network can determine the reference position #1 based on position #1.
- the reference position #2 can be determined based on position #2
- the reference position #3 can be determined based on position #3, so that the first set of configuration information takes effect when the first node is at position #1; the second set of configuration information takes effect when the first node is at position #2; and the third set of configuration information takes effect when the first node is at position #3.
- the first node can use different configuration information for communication depending on its location.
- the triggering condition for the configuration information can be related to the location of the first node when it reconnects to the network after connecting to the second node. For instance, the distance or angle between the reference location used for the triggering condition of the configuration information and the location of the first node when it reconnects to the network is less than or equal to a threshold, allowing the configuration information to take effect during the process of the first node reconnecting to the network.
- this reduces the signaling overhead of instructing the configuration information.
- the triggering condition is an information-based triggering condition. That is, multiple sets of configuration information can be triggered based on different information.
- the first node after the first node receives the first indication information, when the first node receives different information used to trigger the configuration information, it triggers different configuration information (that is, the configuration information corresponding to the information received by the first node (i.e. the information used to trigger the configuration information) takes effect).
- different information can be understood as: information with different formats; or, information from different host nodes; or, information with different content; the embodiments of this application are not limited thereto.
- the first set of configuration information can be related to information #1; the second set of configuration information can be related to information #2; and the third set of configuration information can be related to information #3.
- information #1, information 2, and information 3 are all different from each other.
- the first node releases its original configuration information and acquires new configuration information. Therefore, if the first node receives information to trigger configuration information after accessing the second node, it indicates that the first node has re-accessed the network. It should be understood that the first node switches between different host nodes during its movement; this switching process can usually be considered as a network access process. Therefore, after accessing the second node, switching between different new host nodes during movement can be considered as the first node re-accessing the network during its movement. Alternatively, the first node transitions from RRC-idle to RRC-connected/inactive states.
- the first set of configuration information is related to information #1; the second set of configuration information is related to information #2; and the third set of configuration information is related to information #3. Therefore, after the first node connects to the second node, if information #1 is received, it means that the first set of configuration information is effective; if information #2 is received, it means that the second set of configuration information is effective; and if information #3 is received, it means that the third set of configuration information is effective.
- each set of configuration information takes effect when the first node receives different information used to trigger the configuration. Therefore, the first node can use different configuration information for communication based on the different information received to trigger the configuration. It is understood that the original configuration information will be released and new configuration information will be acquired. Therefore, if the first node receives information used to trigger the configuration after connecting to the second node, it indicates that the first node has reconnected to the network. In other words, during the process of reconnecting to the network after connecting to the second node, the first node will acquire different information used to trigger the configuration. This allows the configuration information to take effect during the process of the first node reconnecting to the network. For example, the information used to trigger the configuration can be represented by 1 bit. Compared to the scheme where the first node resends the configuration information every time it reconnects to the network, this reduces the resource overhead of signaling indicating the configuration information.
- the coverage area of the first node can include the following two possible implementations:
- the configuration information can indicate at least one cell, where the coverage of the first node includes the coverage of the at least one cell, and the cells managed by the first node include the at least one cell.
- an IAB node can manage one or more cells, and thus the coverage area of an IAB node can include the coverage areas of those one or more cells. Therefore, the cells managed by an IAB node are typically used to indicate the coverage area of that IAB node.
- the configuration information indicating at least one cell may include: an identifier indicating at least one cell.
- the cell identifier may be a physical cell identifier (PCI).
- configuration information can indicate at least one cell through a cell list (such as a PCI list).
- a cell list such as a PCI list.
- multiple sets of configuration information can correspond to different cell lists.
- the configuration information can indicate one or more sub-regions.
- the coverage area of the first node includes these one or more sub-regions.
- one or more sub-regions can be referred to as a group of sub-regions; therefore, multiple sets of configuration information correspond to different groups of sub-regions.
- the following will use one or more sub-regions indicated by any one of the multiple sets of configuration information as an example, and will not be elaborated further here.
- the configuration information indicates one or more sub-regions, including: the configuration information indicates the reference position and threshold corresponding to one or more sub-regions respectively; wherein, the first sub-region is determined according to the reference position and threshold corresponding to the first sub-region, and the first sub-region is any one of the one or more sub-regions.
- the reference position and threshold corresponding to one or more sub-regions can be understood as: the reference position corresponding to one or more sub-regions, and the threshold corresponding to one or more sub-regions; that is, in one or more sub-regions, each sub-region corresponds to a reference position, and each sub-region corresponds to a threshold.
- the reference positions corresponding to different sub-regions can be the same or different; similarly, the thresholds corresponding to different sub-regions can be the same or different.
- the reference position and threshold corresponding to the sub-region can be implemented using a table; for instance, it can be implemented as shown in Table 1:
- the reference positions and thresholds corresponding to each sub-region can be implemented using sets, which may include the following: ⁇ sub-region #0; reference position #0; threshold #0 ⁇ , ⁇ sub-region #1; reference position #1; threshold #1 ⁇ , ⁇ sub-region #2; reference position #2; threshold #2 ⁇ , ⁇ sub-region #3; reference position #3; threshold #3 ⁇ , ⁇ ... ⁇ .
- the first column of the set represents each sub-region
- the second column represents the reference position corresponding to each sub-region
- the third column represents the threshold corresponding to each sub-region.
- the reference position corresponding to sub-region #0 is reference position #0
- the threshold corresponding to sub-region #0 is threshold #0
- the reference position corresponding to sub-region #1 is reference position #1
- the threshold corresponding to sub-region #1 is threshold #1
- ... the reference position corresponding to sub-region #3 is reference position #3
- the threshold corresponding to sub-region #3 is threshold #3.
- the configuration information can indicate the identifiers (such as the index of each sub-region) corresponding to one or more sub-regions.
- the first node can combine the identifiers corresponding to one or more sub-regions, as well as the correspondence between one or more sub-regions and their respective reference positions and thresholds (as shown in Table 1 above), to determine the reference position and threshold corresponding to each sub-region.
- the configuration information can indicate sub-regions #0 to #2; in this case, the reference position corresponding to sub-region #0 is reference position #0, and the threshold corresponding to sub-region #0 is threshold #0; the reference position corresponding to sub-region #1 is reference position #1, and the threshold corresponding to sub-region #1 is threshold #1; the reference position corresponding to sub-region #2 is reference position #2, and the threshold corresponding to sub-region #2 is threshold #2.
- the distance between the reference position corresponding to the first sub-region and any position on the boundary of the first sub-region is less than or equal to the threshold corresponding to the first sub-region.
- the first node can draw a circular region by using the first reference position corresponding to the first sub-region as the center; this circular region is the first sub-region.
- the radius of the circular region can be less than or equal to the threshold corresponding to the first sub-region. That is, the distance between any position on the boundary of the circular region (i.e., the first sub-region) and the center of the circle (i.e., the reference position corresponding to the first sub-region) is less than or equal to the threshold corresponding to the first sub-region.
- the first path is the transmission path between the first and second nodes. Therefore, multiple sets of configuration information correspond to different information for the first path.
- the configuration information may indicate the identifier of the first path, or the configuration information may indicate the bearer information on the first path, or the configuration information may indicate the routing information of the first path.
- the first path refers to: IAB node #3 ⁇ IAB node #2 ⁇ host node A; in Figure 11(b), the first path refers to: IAB node #3 ⁇ IAB node #2 ⁇ IAB node #4 ⁇ host node A.
- the first path refers to: IAB node #3 ⁇ IAB node #1 ⁇ host node B; in Figure 11(b), the first path refers to: IAB node #3 ⁇ IAB node #1 ⁇ IAB node #5 ⁇ host node B.
- multiple sets of configuration information can correspond to different address information. Therefore, when different configuration information takes effect, the address information of the first node will be different.
- the address information can be an Internet Protocol (IP) address or a BAP address. That is, multiple sets of configuration information can correspond to different IP addresses, or multiple sets of configuration information can correspond to different BAP addresses.
- IP Internet Protocol
- BAP BAP address
- the configuration information may indicate the paging area of the first node by indicating at least one tracking area code (TAC) and/or at least one radio access network area code (RAC (or RANAC)). That is, the configuration information indicating the paging area of the first node includes: the configuration information indicating at least one TAC, and/or the configuration information indicating at least one RAC.
- TAC tracking area code
- RAC radio access network area code
- the paging area of the first node includes at least one tracking area (TA) corresponding to at least one TAC, and/or the paging area of the first node includes at least one radio access network area (RA) corresponding to at least one TAC.
- TA tracking area
- RA radio access network area
- a TA consists of one or more RAs; therefore, at least one RA corresponding to a TAC can be understood as: the TA corresponding to a TAC consists of that at least one RA. In other words, a unique TA or TAC can be determined based on the RA.
- At least one TAC can be a set of TACs, or a collection of TACs.
- at least one RAC can be a set of RACs, or a collection of RACs. Therefore, multiple sets of configuration information can correspond to different sets of TACs, and/or multiple sets of configuration information can correspond to different sets of RACs.
- configuration information indicator triggering condition, coverage area of the first node, information of the first path, address information of the first node, and paging area of the first node
- coverage area of the first node is represented by a cell list
- address information of the first node is represented by an IP address or BAP address
- paging information of the first node is represented by a TAC set and/or a RAC set
- multiple sets of configuration information may include the contents shown in Table 2:
- Table 2 is an exemplary implementation of multiple sets of configuration information indicated by the first indication information; in fact, multiple sets of configuration information may also include any one or more parameters in Table 2 above, that is, multiple sets of configuration information may include any one or more columns of information in Table 2 above, and this application embodiment does not limit this.
- multiple sets of configuration information can also be regarded as a set of configuration information, or it can also be regarded as a configuration pool. Therefore, the first indication information indicating multiple sets of configuration information can be understood as: the first indication information indicates a set of configuration information or a configuration pool.
- the first indication information may also indicate the validity period of the configuration information set or configuration pool.
- the first node can communicate based on one set of configuration information (such as the first set of configuration information) from multiple sets of configuration information.
- the first reference signal is used for the terminal device to access the network; the second reference signal is used for any one of the IAB node, IAB-MT, or IAB-DU (such as the first node) to access the network.
- the first reference signal can be used for beam scanning when a terminal device accesses an IAB node; correspondingly, the second reference signal is used for beam scanning when any of the IAB node, IAB-MT, or IAB-DU (such as the first node) accesses a host node.
- the implementation of the first reference signal and the second reference signal may include, but is not limited to, the following:
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal are reference signals of different types.
- the first reference signal is the synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (SSB (or SS/PBCH block)) synchronization signal
- the second reference signal is the handover dedicated SSB signal (called HO (handover) SSB).
- SSB synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block
- HO handover dedicated SSB signal
- the first reference signal is a periodic signal, and the period of the first reference signal is the first period.
- the typical period of the first period is in the millisecond range, such as 5 milliseconds (ms), 10 ms, 20 ms, 40 ms, 80 ms, 160 ms, etc.
- the second reference signal can be an aperiodic signal or a periodic signal.
- its period is the second period.
- typical periods of the second period are in the range of 1 second (s), 2s, 4s, 8s, 16s, 32s, 64s, 128s, 256s, 512s, 1024s, etc.
- the second period is longer than the first period.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal differ in at least one of their time-domain position, frequency-domain position, or polarization.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal may differ in their time-domain position (e.g., the occupied frame, subframe, time slot, symbol, etc.), such as when the first and second reference signals can be time-division multiplexed.
- the first and second reference signals may differ in their frequency-domain position, such as when the first and second reference signals can be frequency-division multiplexed, and the second reference signal does not necessarily need to be located at a pre-defined synchronization raster frequency point.
- first and second reference signals employ different polarization methods (e.g., linear polarization, left-hand circular polarization, right-hand circular polarization, elliptic polarization, etc.). Any two of the above three examples can be combined, or all three can be satisfied simultaneously, indicating that at least one of the time-domain position, frequency-domain position, or polarization of the first and second reference signals differs.
- polarization methods e.g., linear polarization, left-hand circular polarization, right-hand circular polarization, elliptic polarization, etc.
- the first reference signal corresponds to a predefined time-domain location, while the time-domain location of the second reference signal is variable.
- the first reference signal corresponding to a predefined time-domain location indicates that the first reference signal has a predefined resource pattern.
- the second reference signal having a variable time-domain location indicates that the resource pattern of the second reference signal is variable, supporting dynamic scheduling.
- Table 3 shows several possible examples of the predefined resource pattern of the first reference signal, assuming that Table 3 describes the first reference signal as an SSB.
- Case A indicates that the sub-carrier space (SCS) of the SSB is 15 kHz, and the time-domain position of the first symbol of the SSB satisfies ⁇ 2, 8 ⁇ + 14 ⁇ n, where n is the time slot, and the maximum number of SSBs is limited.
- SCS sub-carrier space
- the first node can determine the resource pattern of the first reference signal.
- the resource pattern of the second reference signal is variable, meaning that the resource pattern of the second reference signal is not limited to the Cases in Table 3, and can be more flexible (e.g., the position of the first symbol can be variable), which is not limited in this application.
- Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of a first reference signal and a second reference signal provided in this application.
- the first reference signal is shown as a solid box in Figure 12
- the second reference signal is shown as a dashed box in Figure 12.
- the second reference signal in Figure 12 is a periodic signal. It can be seen that the second period is greater than the first period, and the resource pattern of the first reference signal (four solid boxes) is different from the resource pattern of the second reference signal (two dashed boxes).
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal satisfy a quasi-co-address (QCL) relationship.
- QCL quasi-co-address
- the quasi-co-address relationship between the first reference signal and the second reference signal indicates that the properties of the second reference signal can be inferred from the first reference signal.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal are reference signals of the same type, but they are mapped to different types of time domain locations.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal are SSB synchronization signals, but the first reference signal is mapped to a first type of time domain location (referred to as Type-1 Occasion), and the second reference signal is mapped to a second type of time domain location (referred to as Type-2 Occasion).
- the first type of time-domain location satisfies the first period.
- the occcasion of the first reference signal mapping is periodic.
- the second type of time-domain location is either aperiodic or satisfies the second period.
- the occcasion of the second reference signal mapping is periodic.
- the implementation of the first cycle and the second cycle can be referred to the relevant description of Implementation Method 1 above, and will not be repeated here.
- the time-domain position and frequency-domain position of the first reference signal and the second reference signal are different in at least one aspect.
- the time-domain positions of the first reference signal and the second reference signal are different, such as when the first reference signal and the second reference signal can be time-division multiplexed.
- the frequency-domain positions of the first reference signal and the second reference signal are different, such as when the first reference signal and the second reference signal can be frequency-division multiplexed. Either one of the above two examples or both can be satisfied, indicating that the time-domain position and frequency-domain position of the first reference signal and the second reference signal are different.
- the first reference signal corresponds to a predefined time-domain position, while the time-domain position of the second reference signal is variable.
- the first device can determine the resource pattern of the first reference signal.
- the variable resource pattern of the second reference signal means that the resource pattern of the second reference signal is not limited to the Case in Table 3, and can be more flexible (e.g., the position of the first symbol can be variable), which is not limited in this application.
- Figure 13 is a schematic diagram of another first reference signal and second reference signal provided in this application.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal as both being SSB synchronization signals as an example
- the SSB shown in the dashed box is mapped to the second type of time domain position
- the SSB shown in the solid box is mapped to the first type of time domain position.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal satisfy a quasi-co-location relationship.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal can be the same beam mapped to different time slots, thus exhibiting a quasi-co-location relationship.
- the first type of time-domain location and the second type of time-domain location reuse the same SSB index.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal are the same SSB, and the same SSB maps to different types of Occasions
- the first type of time-domain location and the second type of time-domain location reuse the same SSB index (the same SSB index indicates the same SSB).
- the terminal's transmission configuration indicator state (TCI state) remains unchanged during subsequent handover; for example, different types of Occasions reuse the same SSB index, and the terminal's TCI state remains unchanged during handover.
- the first reference signal is the SSB synchronization signal
- the second reference signal is another type of reference signal (such as tracking reference signal (TRS), channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), etc.)
- TRS tracking reference signal
- CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
- the first reference signal is a periodic signal, and the period of the first reference signal is the first period.
- the second reference signal is either an aperiodic signal or a periodic signal. When the second reference signal is a periodic signal, the period of the second reference signal is the second period.
- the implementation of the first cycle and the second cycle can be referred to the relevant description of Implementation Method 1 above, and will not be repeated here.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal differ in at least one of their time-domain position, frequency-domain position, or polarization.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal may differ in their time-domain position, such as by time-division multiplexing.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal may differ in their frequency-domain position, such as by frequency-division multiplexing.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal employ different polarization methods (such as linear polarization, left-hand circular polarization, right-hand circular polarization, elliptic polarization, etc.). Any two of the above examples can be combined, or all three can be satisfied simultaneously, indicating that the first reference signal and the second reference signal differ in at least one of their time-domain position, frequency-domain position, or polarization.
- the first reference signal corresponds to a predefined time-domain position, while the time-domain position of the second reference signal is variable.
- the first device can determine the resource pattern of the first reference signal.
- the variable resource pattern of the second reference signal means that the resource pattern of the second reference signal is not limited to the Case in Table 3, and can be more flexible (e.g., the position of the first symbol can be variable), which is not limited in this application.
- the first node can send the second reference signal via broadcast or multicast (e.g., the first node sends the second reference signal through the MT of its affiliated IAB node).
- the second reference signal can be received by other nodes besides the first node (e.g., at least one third node).
- the following description uses the example of a third node receiving the second reference signal.
- the third node can be a ground node or a non-ground node.
- IAB node #1 can broadcast a second reference signal.
- the second reference signal is received by IAB node #2 and/or host node B. Therefore, IAB node #2 and/or host node B can be regarded as the third node.
- the third node can measure the signal quality of the second reference signal and process the measurement results (i.e., the signal quality of the second reference signal).
- the third node can determine whether it needs to switch the currently connected host node (or the descendant node of the host node (i.e., the parent node of the third node)) based on the signal quality of the second reference signal. For example, if the first node is the parent node of the third node, and the signal quality of the second reference signal is poor, the third node can consider connecting to other nodes (e.g., switching to other nodes). If the first node is not the parent node of the third node (or the ancestor node of the third node), and the signal quality of the second reference signal is good, the third node can consider connecting to the first node (e.g., switching to the first node).
- the third node can also inform the first node of the signal quality of the second reference signal.
- the first node can determine whether the signal quality of the second reference signal interferes with the communication of other nodes, and further adjust its transmission power accordingly.
- the resources used to carry the first reference signal are different from the resources used to carry the second reference signal.
- the first and second reference signals can be carried on different random access channel (RACH) opportunities (ROs); the resources carrying the reference signals can also be called resources associated with the reference signals. Therefore, it can also be considered that the RO associated with the first reference signal is different from the RO associated with the second reference signal.
- RACH random access channel
- ROs random access channel
- the solid shaded box represents the RO associated with the first reference signal
- the dashed shaded box represents the RO associated with the second reference signal.
- the frequency with which terminal devices switch cells (such as IAB nodes or IAB-DUs) is significantly higher than the frequency with which IAB nodes, IAB-MTs, or IAB-DUs (such as the first node) switch their access to the host node. Therefore, for the first node, the frequency with which it sends reference signals for cell search for terminal devices is higher than the frequency with which it sends reference signals for searching for the host node; that is, the period of the SSB used for cell search is shorter.
- the frequency of cell search is much higher than that of IAB-MT or IAB-DU (i.e., the SSB period is shorter). This causes the first node to send SSBs even when it does not need to perform host node searches, resulting in a significant waste of resources. Furthermore, it can cause interference between SSBs (e.g., it becomes impossible to distinguish whether the SSB is used for cell search or host node search).
- the first node uses the first reference signal for cell search and the second reference signal for host node search. Compared with the scheme of directly applying the SSB used for cell search to the host node search process, this can save resources. In addition, it can also avoid interference between reference signals.
- the first node may also broadcast or report its capability information to the host node (or the second node).
- the first node may report its capability information during the process of connecting to the second node; for instance, the capability information may be carried on Msg5.
- the first node may report its capability information after connecting to the second node.
- the first node can indicate its capability information through the second indication information.
- the communication method may further include the following step S1003:
- the first node sends a second indication message to the second node, and correspondingly, the second node receives the second indication message from the first node.
- the second indication message indicates the capability information of the first node.
- the first node sending the second indication information to the second node can be understood as the first node sending the second indication information to the host node it has accessed.
- the second node after receiving the second indication information, the second node can send the second indication information to its parent node until the second indication information is transmitted to the accessed host node.
- the capability information of the first node may include at least one of the following: the type of the first node, whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes, whether the first node and the MT in the IAB node to which the first node belongs support simultaneous switching, and whether the first node supports simultaneously having the functions of an IAB node and a host node.
- the type of the first node is either a non-ground node or a ground node.
- Ground nodes include stationary nodes or mobile nodes, and non-ground nodes include stationary nodes or mobile nodes.
- the second indication information may include at least one of the following: the type of the first node, whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes, whether the first node and the MT in the IAB node to which the first node belongs support simultaneous switching, and whether the first node supports having the functions of both an IAB node and a host node, so as to directly indicate the capability information of the first node.
- the type of the first node may correspond to at least one of the following: whether its IAB node supports serving child nodes; whether the DU in the IAB node supports simultaneous switching; or whether it supports simultaneously having the functions of both an IAB node and a host node.
- the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes; the first node and the MT in the IAB node to which the first node belongs support simultaneous switching; and/or, the first node supports simultaneously having the functions of both an IAB node and a host node.
- the first indication information can indicate the type of the first node to indirectly indicate other characteristics of the first node (such as whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes; whether the first node and the MT in the IAB node to which the first node belongs support simultaneous switching; and whether the first node supports simultaneously having the functions of both an IAB node and a host node).
- the second indication information may include the type of the first node; alternatively, the first node may indirectly indicate its capability information by carrying information for requesting access during the network access process of its affiliated IAB node's MT, using resources that carry access request information.
- the second indication information is the access request information.
- this access request information may be carried in the NTN SSB preamble.
- the implementation of the type of the first node can be referred to the relevant description of the type of IAB node mentioned above, and will not be repeated here.
- the IAB node to which the first node belongs can also be understood as: the IAB node where the first node is located.
- the IAB node to which the first node belongs is IAB node A.
- the host node or core network can configure appropriate access resources for the IAB node to which the first node belongs, based on the type of the first node.
- the access resources can be resources used to carry the preamble (such as RO).
- RO preamble
- dedicated access resources can be configured for the first node for the access process after the first node switches host nodes.
- the host node or core network can deploy a suitable IAB network topology based on whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes. For instance, if the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes, after the first node connects to the network, one or more child nodes can be connected to the IAB node to which the first node belongs, allowing these one or more child nodes to connect to the host node through the first node. If the IAB node to which the first node belongs does not support serving child nodes, there is no need to connect child nodes to the IAB node to which the first node belongs.
- the host node or core network can configure a suitable handover method for the first node based on whether the MTs in the first node and the IAB node to which the first node belongs support simultaneous handover. For instance, if the first node and the MTs in the IAB node to which the first node belongs support simultaneous handover, the host node or core network can configure the same handover trigger time and/or location for the first node and the MTs in the IAB node to which the first node belongs.
- the host node or core network configures the handover trigger time and/or location for the first node and the MTs in the IAB node to which the first node belongs separately, if the first node and the MTs in the IAB node to which the first node belongs do not support simultaneous handover, this can reduce the signaling overhead of the host node or core network in indicating the handover trigger.
- an IAB node refers to the ability of an IAB node to serve at least one terminal device; therefore, the fact that the first node has the function of an IAB node means that the first node can serve at least one terminal device, that is, the IAB node to which the first node belongs can serve at least one terminal device.
- the function of a host node refers to its ability to communicate with the core network through the NTN gateway. Therefore, the first node's host node function means that it can communicate with the core network through the NTN gateway.
- the first node supports simultaneously having the functions of an IAB node and a host node can be understood as whether the first node supports communicating with the core network through the NTN gateway while simultaneously serving at least one terminal device.
- Whether the first node supports simultaneously having the functions of an IAB node and a host node can also be referred to as whether the first node supports co-location of IAB nodes and host nodes.
- the host node or core network can deploy a suitable IAB network topology based on whether the first node supports the functions of both an IAB node and a host node. For instance, if the first node supports the functions of both an IAB node and a host node, the first node can act as a host node and communicate with the core network through the NTN gateway. At the same time, the first node can also provide services to at least one terminal device. If the first node does not support the functions of both an IAB node and a host node, and if the first node has the function of an IAB node, then the first node can only act as an IAB node in the IAB network and provide services to at least one terminal device. If the first node has the function of a host node, then the first node can only act as a host node in the IAB network and communicate with the core network through the NTN gateway.
- the first node if the first node has the function of an IAB node, the first node can be located at node A or node B in Figure 17(a) or Figure 17(b); if the first node has the function of a host node, the first node can be located at node C in Figure 17(b); if the first node supports the functions of both an IAB node and a host node, the first node can be located at node C in Figure 17(a).
- the above describes how the host node or core network processes the capability information of the first node when it includes different parameters (i.e., the type of the first node, whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes, whether the MT in the first node and the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports simultaneous switching, and whether the first node supports having the functions of both an IAB node and a host node).
- the above parameters can also be used in combination.
- the following describes in detail the processing procedure of the host node or core network when multiple parameters are included in the capability information.
- the host node or core network can configure the handover method for the child nodes of the first node based on whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes and the type of the first node. If the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes and the first node is a non-terrestrial node, the target host node or core network can configure a new trigger handover time and/or location for the IAB node to which the first node belongs, to trigger the handover of the child nodes of the first node after the handover of the IAB node to which the first node belongs.
- the host node or core network may configure the triggering period and/or triggering event for the functions (such as IAB functions, host node functions, or whether any of the child nodes are supported) of the first node based on whether the first node supports the functions of both IAB node and host node, and whether it supports serving child nodes.
- functions such as IAB functions, host node functions, or whether any of the child nodes are supported
- the triggering event can be related to at least one of the following: the location of the first node, the services carried by the first node, or the latency between the first node and the target host node.
- the triggering event is that the distance or angle between the location of the first node and the preset reference location is less than or equal to a third threshold.
- the triggering event is that the throughput of the services carried by the first node or the amount of traffic in the buffer is greater than a fourth threshold.
- the communication latency between the first node and the target host node is greater than a fifth threshold.
- the third, fourth, and fifth thresholds can be configured for the first node by the host node or the core network.
- both Node A and Node B have the functions of IAB nodes and support service child nodes;
- Node C supports having the functions of both IAB nodes and host nodes, and also supports service child nodes.
- the first node can be located in any of Node A, Node B, or Node C.
- the relationship between the functions of the first node and the triggering time of that function can satisfy the relationship shown in Table 4.
- the host node or core network can be configured to trigger the IAB node function of node A in time period #1 (e.g., time period t1-t2, where t1 is less than t2, and both t1 and t2 are positive integers). That is, node A has the IAB node function during time period #1. Furthermore, during time period #1, node A may or may not support serving child nodes. In time period #2, node A may be configured to not support serving child nodes. That is, during time period #2, node A does not support serving child nodes. Furthermore, during time period #2, node A may or may not have the IAB node function.
- time period #1 e.g., time period t1-t2, where t1 is less than t2, and both t1 and t2 are positive integers. That is, node A has the IAB node function during time period #1. Furthermore, during time period #1, node A may or may not support serving child nodes. In time period #2, node A may be configured
- the host node or core network can be configured to trigger the IAB node function of node B in time period #3; furthermore, during time period #3, node B may or may not support serving child nodes.
- time period #4 node B may or may not support serving child nodes; furthermore, during time period #4, node B may or may not possess the IAB node function.
- the host node or core network can be configured to trigger the host node function of node C in time period #5.
- node C may or may not have the function of an IAB node.
- node C may or may not support service child nodes.
- the IAB node function of node C is triggered in time period #6.
- node C may or may not have the function of a host node.
- node C may or may not support service child nodes.
- the function of node C not supporting service nodes is triggered in time period #7.
- node C may or may not have the function of an IAB node and/or a host node.
- time periods #1 to #7 may be the same or different, and this embodiment does not impose such limitations.
- the relationship between the function of the first node and the triggering event that triggers the function can satisfy the relationship shown in Table 5:
- node A has the functionality of an IAB node, but node A does not support serving child nodes.
- node B has the functionality of an IAB node, but node B does not support serving child nodes.
- node C has both the functionality of an IAB node and a host node, but node C does not support serving child nodes.
- Events #1, #2, and #3 can be related to at least one of the following: the location of the first node, the services carried by the first node, or the latency between the first node and the target host node. Events #1, #2, and #3 can be the same or different. For details on the implementation of events #1, #2, and #3, please refer to the descriptions of the triggering events above; they will not be repeated here.
- the host node or core network can be configured to trigger the IAB node function of node A during time period #1 when event #1 is triggered. Furthermore, during time period #1, node A may or may not support serving child nodes. During time period #2, node A may not support serving node functions; furthermore, during time period #2, node A may or may not possess IAB node functions. Similarly, the host node or core network can be configured to trigger the IAB node function of node B during time period #3 when event #2 is triggered. Furthermore, during time period #3, node B may or may not support serving child nodes.
- node B may or may not support serving node functions; furthermore, during time period #4, node B may or may not possess IAB node functions.
- the host node function of node C will be triggered in time period #5.
- node C may or may not have the functions of an IAB node.
- node C may or may not support service child nodes.
- the IAB node function of node C will be triggered in time period #6.
- node C may or may not have the functions of a host node.
- node C may or may not support service child nodes.
- the service node function of node C will not be supported in time period #7.
- node C may or may not have the functions of an IAB node and/or a host node.
- Tables 4 to 6 above exemplarily describe the relationship between the function of a node and the triggering time and/or triggering event that triggers that function.
- the correspondence between the function of a node and the triggering time and/or triggering event that triggers that function can also be any other possible relationship besides the above relationship.
- Its implementation is similar to the implementation of the relationship between the function of a node and the triggering time and/or triggering event that triggers that function in Tables 4 to 6 above. For details, please refer to the relevant descriptions in Tables 4 to 6 above, which will not be repeated here.
- the first node can report its capability information to the host node, so that the host node or core network can configure appropriate configuration information for the first node according to the capability information, such as configuring appropriate handover methods and access resources for the first node, thereby improving the effectiveness of mobility management.
- the second indication information may also indicate the effective period of the first node's capability information and/or the effective area of the first node's capability information.
- the capability information, effective period, and effective area of the first node can satisfy the relationship shown in Table 7:
- the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes; during time period #2, when the first node is located in region #2, the MT of the first node and its IAB node to which it belongs supports simultaneous switching; during time period #3, when the first node is located in region #3, the first node supports having the functions of both an IAB node and a host node.
- time periods #1, #2, and #3 can be the same or different; furthermore, if time periods #1, #2, and #3 are different, there can be overlap between them.
- regions #1, #2, and #3 can be the same or different; furthermore, if regions #1, #2, and #3 are different, there can be overlap between them.
- the first node can also report the effective period and/or effective area of its capability information to the host node, so that the host node or core network can configure appropriate configuration information for the first node according to the effective period and/or effective area of the capability information; such as configuring appropriate triggering periods and/or triggering events for the first node to trigger its different functions, thereby improving the effectiveness of mobility management.
- the methods and/or steps implemented by the first node can also be implemented by devices or components (e.g., processors, circuits, chips, or chip systems) that implement some or all of the functions of the first node; similarly, the methods and/or steps implemented by the second node can also be implemented by devices or components (e.g., processors, circuits, chips, or chip systems) that implement some or all of the functions of the first node.
- the chip system can be composed of chips, or it can include chips and other discrete devices.
- the communication device includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of each function.
- this application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in hardware or by computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
- This application embodiment can divide the communication device into functional modules according to the above method embodiment. For example, each function can be divided into a separate functional module, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module.
- the integrated module can be implemented in hardware or as a software functional module. It should be noted that the module division in this application embodiment is illustrative and only represents one logical functional division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
- Figure 18 shows a schematic diagram of a communication device 1800.
- the communication device 1800 includes a processing module 1801 and a transceiver module 1802.
- the communication device 1800 can be used to implement the functions described in the first or second node above.
- the communication device 1800 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG18) for storing program instructions and data.
- the transceiver module 1802 also referred to as a transceiver unit, is used to implement sending and/or receiving functions.
- the transceiver module 1802 may consist of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver unit, an input/output interface, or a communication interface.
- the transceiver module 1802 may include a receiving module and a sending module, respectively configured to perform receiving and sending steps performed by the first node or the second node in the above method embodiments, and/or other processes to support the technology described herein; the processing module 1801 may be configured to perform processing steps (e.g., determination) performed by the first node or the second node in the above method embodiments, and/or other processes to support the technology described herein.
- the transceiver module 1802 is configured to receive first indication information, which indicates multiple sets of configuration information, each set of configuration information having different triggering conditions.
- the processing module 1801 is configured to perform communication based on the first set of configuration information, wherein the multiple sets of configuration information include the first set of configuration information.
- the transceiver module 1802 is also configured to receive first indication information from a second node, which is located on the host node, or the second node is located on a descendant node of the host node.
- the processing module 1801 is also used to communicate according to the first set of configuration information when the triggering conditions corresponding to the first set of configuration information are met.
- the transceiver module 1802 is also used to send second indication information, which indicates the capability information of the first node.
- the processing module 1801 is also used to communicate based on the first set of configuration information at a first moment; the transceiver module 1802 is also used to communicate based on the second set of configuration information at a second moment, wherein the multiple sets of configuration information include the second set of configuration information, and the second moment is located after the first moment.
- the processing module 1801 is configured to determine first indication information, which indicates multiple sets of configuration information, each set of configuration information having different triggering conditions.
- the transceiver module 1802 is configured to send the first indication information.
- the transceiver module 1802 is also configured to receive first indication information from the parent node of the second node, wherein the parent node of the second node is located on the host node, or the parent node of the second node is located on a descendant node of the host node.
- the transceiver module 1802 is also used to receive second indication information, which indicates the capability information of the first node.
- the capability information of the first node includes at least one of the following: the type of the first node, which is either a non-ground node or a ground node; ground nodes include stationary nodes or mobile nodes; non-ground nodes include stationary nodes or mobile nodes; whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes; whether the MT in the first node and the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports simultaneous switching; and whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports simultaneously having the functions of both an IAB node and a host node.
- the second indication information may also indicate the effective segment of the capability information and/or the effective area of the capability information.
- any one of the multiple sets of configuration information indicates at least one of the following: identifier, trigger condition, coverage area of the first node, information of the first path, address information of the first node, paging area of the first node, configuration information of the first type of reference signal, or configuration information of the second type of reference signal; wherein, the trigger condition is used to trigger the configuration information, the first path is the transmission path between the first node and the host node to which the first node is connected, the configuration information of the first type of reference signal is used to transmit the first reference signal, and the configuration information of the second type of reference signal is used to transmit the second reference signal.
- the triggering condition indicated by the first set of configuration information may include at least one of the following: the local clock of the first node is within a first time period; the distance between the first node and the reference position is less than or equal to a first threshold; the angle between the first node and the reference position is less than or equal to a second threshold.
- the configuration information indicating the coverage of the first node includes: the first set of configuration information indicating at least one cell, the cells managed by the first node including at least one cell, and the coverage of the first node including the coverage of at least one cell.
- the configuration information indicating the paging area of the first node includes: the configuration information indicating at least one TAC, and the paging area of the first node including at least one TA corresponding to at least one TAC; and/or, the configuration information indicating at least one RAC, and the paging area of the first node including at least one RA corresponding to at least one TAC.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal have different signal types.
- the period of the first reference signal is a first period
- the second reference signal is an aperiodic signal
- the period of the second reference signal is a second period
- the second period is greater than the first period
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal satisfy a quasi-co-address relationship.
- At least one of the time domain position, frequency domain position, or polarization mode of the first reference signal and the second reference signal is different.
- the first reference signal corresponds to a predefined time-domain position; the time-domain position of the second reference signal is variable.
- the first reference signal and the second reference signal are SSB signals; the first reference signal is mapped to a time-domain position of a first type, and the time-domain position of the first type satisfies a first period; the second reference signal is mapped to a time-domain position of a second type, and the time-domain position of the second type is non-periodic or satisfies a second period, the second period being greater than the first period.
- the first type of time-domain location and the second type of time-domain location reuse the same SSB index.
- the first indication information is carried in any one of RRC signaling, F1-AP message, or Xn-AP message.
- module can refer to an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a circuit, a processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuits, and/or other devices that can provide the above functions.
- ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
- the function/implementation process of the transceiver module 1802 can be implemented through the input/output interface (or communication interface) of the chip or chip system, and the function/implementation process of the processing module 1801 can be implemented through the processor (or processing circuit) of the chip or chip system.
- the communication device 1800 provided in this embodiment can execute the above method, the technical effects it can achieve can be referred to the above method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
- the first node or the second node described in the embodiments of this application can also be implemented using one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), programmable logic devices (PLDs), controllers, state machines, gate logic, discrete hardware components, any other suitable circuits, or any combination of circuits capable of performing the various functions described throughout this application.
- FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
- PLDs programmable logic devices
- controllers state machines
- gate logic discrete hardware components
- any other suitable circuits any combination of circuits capable of performing the various functions described throughout this application.
- the first node or second node described in this application embodiment can be implemented using a general bus architecture.
- FIG19 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device 1900 provided in an embodiment of this application.
- the communication device 1900 includes a processor 1901.
- the communication device 1900 can be a first node, or a chip or chip system therein; or, the communication device 1900 can be a second node, or a chip or module therein.
- FIG19 only shows the main components of the communication device 1900.
- the communication device 1900 includes means of the necessary form, such as modules, units, elements, circuits, or interfaces, to be appropriately configured together to perform the communication method described in this embodiment.
- the communication device 1900 may be an IAB node, host node, network device, terminal device, core network, or other device as shown in any of Figures 1 to 8 above, or it may be a component (e.g., a chip) within these devices, used to implement the communication method described in the above method embodiments.
- the communication device 1900 includes one or more processors 1901.
- the processor 1901 may be a general-purpose processor or a dedicated processor, for example, a baseband processor or a central processing unit.
- the baseband processor can be used to process communication protocols and communication data
- the central processing unit can be used to control the communication device (e.g., RAN node, terminal, or chip), execute software programs, and process data from the software programs.
- the processor 1901 may include a program 1903 (sometimes referred to as code or instructions) that can be run on the processor 1901 to cause the communication device 1900 to perform the communication method described in the above embodiments.
- a program 1903 (sometimes referred to as code or instructions) that can be run on the processor 1901 to cause the communication device 1900 to perform the communication method described in the above embodiments.
- the communication device 1900 includes circuitry (not shown in FIG19) for implementing the functions described in the first or second node of the above embodiments.
- the communication device 1900 may include one or more memories 1902 storing a program 1904 (sometimes referred to as code or instructions), which can be run on the memory 1902 to cause the communication device 1900 to perform the communication method described in the above embodiments.
- a program 1904 sometimes referred to as code or instructions
- the processor 1901 and/or memory 1902 may include AI modules 1907 and/or 1908, which are used to implement AI-related functions.
- the AI module may be implemented through software, hardware, or a combination of both.
- the AI module may include a RIC module.
- the AI module may be a near real-time RIC or a non-real-time RIC.
- the processor 1901 and/or memory 1902 may also store data.
- the processor and memory may be configured separately or integrated together.
- the communication device 1900 may further include a transceiver 1905 and/or an antenna 1906.
- the processor 1901 sometimes referred to as a processing unit, controls the communication device (e.g., a RAN node or terminal).
- the transceiver 1905 sometimes referred to as a transceiver unit, transceiver, transceiver circuit, or transceiver, is used to realize the transmission and reception functions of the communication device through the antenna 1906.
- the function/implementation of the processing module 1801 in Figure 18 can be achieved by the processor 1901 in the communication device 1900 shown in Figure 19 calling computer execution instructions stored in the memory 1902.
- the function/implementation of the transceiver module 1802 in Figure 18 can be achieved by the transceiver 1905 in the communication device 1900 shown in Figure 19.
- the first node or the second node in this application may adopt the composition structure shown in FIG20, or include the components shown in FIG20.
- FIG20 is a schematic diagram of the composition of a communication device 2000 provided in this application.
- the communication device 2000 may be a terminal device or a chip or system-on-a-chip in a terminal device; or, it may be a module, chip or system-on-a-chip in the first node or the second node.
- the communication device 2000 includes at least one processor 2001 and at least one communication interface ( Figure 20 is merely an example illustrating the inclusion of a communication interface 2004 and a processor 2001).
- the communication device 2000 may also include a communication bus 2002 and a memory 2003.
- Processor 2001 can be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a general-purpose processor, a network processor (NP), a digital signal processor (DSP), a graphics processing unit (GPU), an artificial intelligence processor (AI processor) or a neural processing unit (NPU), a microprocessor, a microcontroller, a programmable logic device (PLD), or any combination thereof.
- processor 2001 can also be other devices with processing capabilities, such as circuits, devices, or software modules, without limitation.
- the communication bus 2002 is used to connect different components in the communication device 2000, enabling communication between them.
- the communication bus 2002 can be a peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus, etc.
- PCI peripheral component interconnect
- EISA extended industry standard architecture
- This bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. For ease of illustration, only one thick line is used in Figure 20, but this does not indicate that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
- Communication interface 2004 is used for communicating with other devices or communication networks.
- communication interface 2004 can be a module, circuit, transceiver, or any device capable of communication.
- communication interface 2004 can also be an input/output interface located within processor 2001, used to implement signal input and signal output for the processor.
- Memory 2003 can be a device with storage function for storing instructions and/or data. Instructions can be computer programs.
- the memory 2003 may be a cache, read-only memory (ROM), or other type of static storage device capable of storing static information and/or instructions; it may also be random access memory (RAM) or other type of dynamic storage device capable of storing information and/or instructions; it may also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM), or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compressed optical discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital universal optical discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media, or other magnetic storage devices, without limitation.
- ROM read-only memory
- RAM random access memory
- EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
- CD-ROM compact disc read-only memory
- optical disc storage including compressed optical discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital universal optical discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.
- magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, without limitation.
- the memory 2003 can exist independently of the processor 2001, or it can be integrated with the processor 2001.
- the memory 2003 can be located inside or outside the communication device 2000, without limitation.
- the processor 2001 can be used to execute the instructions stored in the memory 2003 to implement the methods provided in the following embodiments of this application.
- the communication device 2000 may also include an output device 2005 and an input device 2006.
- the output device 2005 communicates with the processor 2001 and can display information in various ways.
- the output device 2005 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light-emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector, etc.
- the input device 2006 communicates with the processor 2001 and can receive user input in various ways.
- the input device 2006 may be a mouse, keyboard, touchscreen device, or sensor device, etc.
- the communication device 1800 shown in FIG18 can take the form of the communication device 2000 shown in FIG20 in terms of hardware implementation.
- the function/implementation of the processing module 1801 in Figure 18 can be achieved by the processor 2001 in the communication device 2000 shown in Figure 20 calling computer execution instructions stored in the memory 2003.
- the function/implementation of the transceiver module 1802 in Figure 18 can be achieved by the communication interface 2004 in the communication device 2000 shown in Figure 20.
- first node or the second node does not constitute a specific limitation on the first node or the second node.
- the first node or the second node may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine some components, or split some components, or have different component arrangements.
- the components shown in the figure may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
- this application also provides a communication device, which includes a processor for implementing the methods in any of the above method embodiments.
- the communication device also includes a memory.
- This memory stores necessary computer programs and data.
- the computer program may include instructions, which a processor can invoke to instruct the communication device to execute the methods described in any of the above method embodiments.
- the memory may not be present in the communication device.
- the communication device also includes an interface circuit, which is a code/data read/write interface circuit, used to receive computer execution instructions (which are stored in memory and may be read directly from memory or may be transmitted through other devices) and transmit them to the processor.
- an interface circuit which is a code/data read/write interface circuit, used to receive computer execution instructions (which are stored in memory and may be read directly from memory or may be transmitted through other devices) and transmit them to the processor.
- the communication device also includes a communication interface for communicating with modules outside the communication device.
- the communication device can be a chip or a chip system.
- the communication device can be composed of chips or may include chips and other discrete devices. This application does not specifically limit this.
- This application also provides a computer-readable storage medium having a computer program or instructions stored thereon, which, when executed by a computer, implements the functions of any of the above-described method embodiments.
- This application also provides a computer program product that, when executed by a computer, implements the functions of any of the above method embodiments.
- the systems, apparatuses, and methods described in this application can also be implemented in other ways.
- the apparatus embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
- the division of units is only a logical functional division, and in actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
- multiple units or components may be combined or integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored or not executed.
- the couplings or direct couplings or communication connections shown or discussed may be through some interfaces; indirect couplings or communication connections between devices or units may be electrical, mechanical, or other forms.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate; that is, they may be located in one place or distributed across multiple network units.
- the components shown as units may or may not be physical units. Some or all of the units can be selected to achieve the purpose of this embodiment according to actual needs.
- the functional units in the various embodiments of this application can be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit can exist physically separately, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
- implementation can be achieved, in whole or in part, through software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
- implementation can be, in whole or in part, in the form of a computer program product.
- This computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
- the computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
- the computer instructions can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another.
- the computer instructions can be transmitted from one website, computer, server, or data center to another website, computer, server, or data center via wired (e.g., coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
- the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium accessible to a computer or a data storage device containing one or more servers, data centers, etc., that can be integrated with the medium.
- the available medium can be a magnetic medium (e.g., floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), an optical medium (e.g., DVD), or a semiconductor medium (e.g., solid-state drive (SSD)).
- the computer may include the aforementioned apparatus.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Astronomy & Astrophysics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本申请要求于2024年04月29日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202410537870.6、申请名称为“通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to Chinese Patent Application No. 202410537870.6, filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of China on April 29, 2024, entitled "Communication Method and Apparatus", the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
本申请实施例涉及通信领域,尤其涉及通信方法及装置。This application relates to the field of communications, and more particularly to communication methods and apparatus.
第五代(5th generation,5G)移动通信系统针对网络各项性能指标提出了较为严苛的要求。为了满足5G系统的性能要求,一方面需要大量密集部署小站,另一方便需要为偏远地区提供网络覆盖。然而在这两种场景下提供光纤回传的成本高,施工难度大,因此经济便捷的接入回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul,IAB)技术应运而生。 Fifth -generation (5G) mobile communication systems impose stringent requirements on various network performance indicators. To meet the performance requirements of 5G systems, a large number of small cells need to be deployed densely, and network coverage needs to be provided for remote areas. However, providing fiber optic backhaul in both scenarios is costly and difficult to implement. Therefore, the cost-effective and convenient integrated access and backhaul (IAB) technology has emerged.
IAB技术中的接入链路(access link,AL)和回传链路(backhaul link,BH)采用无线传输方案,减少了光纤部署,从而可以满足当前网络对超大容量、更广覆盖、超高可靠、超低时延等性能指标的要求。其中,当IAB节点(IAB node)为用户设备(user equipment,UE)提供服务时,IAB节点可以视为IAB分布式单元(IAB distributed unit,IAB-DU);或者,当IAB节点面向其父节点(如IAB宿主(IAB donor)节点)时,IAB节点也可以作为IAB移动终端(IAB mobile termination,IAB-MT)。In IAB technology, the access link (AL) and backhaul link (BH) adopt wireless transmission schemes, reducing fiber optic deployment and thus meeting the current network requirements for performance indicators such as ultra-high capacity, wider coverage, ultra-high reliability, and ultra-low latency. Specifically, when an IAB node provides services to a user equipment (UE), it can be considered an IAB distributed unit (IAB-DU); or, when an IAB node faces its parent node (such as an IAB donor node), it can also act as an IAB mobile termination (IAB-MT).
在移动IAB(mobile IAB,mIAB)场景中,会触发IAB-DU频繁的切换其接入的宿主节点,进而造成IAB-DU的配置信息的频繁释放与更新,使得指示IAB-DU的配置信息的信令开销增加。In mobile IAB (mIAB) scenarios, IAB-DUs will frequently switch the host nodes they access, which will cause frequent release and updates of IAB-DU configuration information, increasing the signaling overhead of instructing IAB-DU configuration information.
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及装置,能够降低指示配置信息的信令开销。This application provides a communication method and apparatus that can reduce the signaling overhead of indicating configuration information.
第一方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由第一节点执行,其中第一节点可以为实现部分或全部第一节点功能的设备、部件(例如处理器、电路、芯片、或芯片系统等)、逻辑模块或软件。该方法包括:接收第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示多组配置信息,多组配置信息的触发条件不同。并根据第一组配置信息,进行通信,多组配置信息包括第一组配置信息。Firstly, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a first node, wherein the first node can be a device, component (e.g., processor, circuit, chip, or chip system), logic module, or software that implements some or all of the functions of the first node. The method includes: receiving first indication information, the first indication information indicating multiple sets of configuration information, the multiple sets of configuration information having different triggering conditions; and performing communication based on the first set of configuration information, the multiple sets of configuration information including the first set of configuration information.
基于该方案,接入回传一体化IAB分布式单元DU(IAB-DU,即第一节点)接收其宿主节点配置的触发条件不同的多组配置信息(即宿主节点通过第一指示信息指示的多组配置信息);从而可以根据多组配置信息中的一组配置信息(即第一组配置信息)进行通信。Based on this scheme, the integrated IAB distributed unit DU (IAB-DU, i.e., the first node) receives multiple sets of configuration information with different trigger conditions configured by its host node (i.e., multiple sets of configuration information indicated by the host node through the first indication information); thus, it can communicate based on one set of configuration information (i.e., the first set of configuration information).
示例性的,多组配置信息对应的触发条件可以分别与第一节点接入该宿主节点之后,重新接入网络(如重新接入该宿主节点或者新的宿主节点,或切换至其他宿主节点)的时间相关;从而第一节点重新接入网络的过程中,均会触发不同的配置信息;使得第一节点在接入该宿主节点之后,每次重新接入网络的过程中,存在一组配置信息生效,使得第一节点可以通过该一组配置信息进行通信。相较于第一节点每次接入网络的过程中,重新获取配置信息的方案,能够降低指示配置信息的信令开销。For example, the triggering conditions corresponding to multiple sets of configuration information can be related to the time when the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the host node (such as reconnecting to the host node or a new host node, or switching to another host node). Therefore, different configuration information will be triggered during each reconnection process of the first node. This ensures that each time the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the host node, one set of configuration information is in effect, allowing the first node to communicate using this set of configuration information. Compared to the scheme where the first node reacquires configuration information each time it connects to the network, this reduces the signaling overhead of instructing the configuration information.
在一种可能的设计中,接收第一指示信息,包括:接收来自第二节点的第一指示信息,第二节点位于宿主节点,或者,第二节点位于宿主节点的后代节点。In one possible design, receiving the first indication information includes: receiving the first indication information from a second node, which is located on the host node, or the second node is located on a descendant node of the host node.
在一种可能的设计中,配置信息指示触发条件,根据第一组配置信息,进行通信,包括:在满足第一组配置信息对应的触发条件的情况下,根据第一组配置信息,进行通信。In one possible design, the configuration information indicates the triggering conditions, and communication is performed based on the first set of configuration information, including: when the triggering conditions corresponding to the first set of configuration information are met, communication is performed based on the first set of configuration information.
在一种可能的设计中,第一组配置信息,进行通信,包括:在第一时刻根据第一组配置信息,进行通信;该通信方法还包括:在第二时刻根据第二组配置信息,进行通信,多组配置信息包括第二组配置信息,第二时刻位于第一时刻之后。In one possible design, the first set of configuration information is communicated, including: communicating based on the first set of configuration information at a first moment; the communication method further includes: communicating based on the second set of configuration information at a second moment, wherein the multiple sets of configuration information include the second set of configuration information, and the second moment is after the first moment.
基于上述两种可能的设计,不同组的配置信息是在满足其对应的触发条件下触发的(如第一组配置信息是在满足其对应的触发条件下触发的);示例性的,触发条件可以与时间相关,因此,可以认为不同组的配置信息是在不同时间触发的。由于宿主节点一次向下发了多组配置信息,因此第一节点可以在不同时刻,采用不同的配置信息进行通信,相较于第一节点分别每个配置信息的指示的方案,能够降低指示配置信息的信令开销。Based on the two possible designs described above, different groups of configuration information are triggered when their corresponding triggering conditions are met (e.g., the first group of configuration information is triggered when its corresponding triggering conditions are met). For example, the triggering conditions can be time-related; therefore, it can be considered that different groups of configuration information are triggered at different times. Since the host node sends down multiple groups of configuration information at once, the first node can communicate using different configuration information at different times. Compared to the scheme where the first node indicates each configuration information separately, this reduces the signaling overhead of indicating configuration information.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信方法还包括:发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息指示第一节点的能力信息。In one possible design, the communication method further includes sending a second indication message that indicates the capability information of the first node.
基于该可能的设计,第一节点可以向宿主节点上报其能力信息,使得宿主节点或核心网能够根据该能力信息为第一节点配置合适的配置信息;如为第一节点配置合适的切换方式、接入资源等,从而提升移动性管理的有效性。Based on this possible design, the first node can report its capability information to the host node, enabling the host node or core network to configure appropriate configuration information for the first node based on this capability information; such as configuring appropriate handover methods and access resources for the first node, thereby improving the effectiveness of mobility management.
第二方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由第二节点执行,其中第一节点可以为实现部分或全部第一节点功能的设备、部件(例如处理器、电路、芯片、或芯片系统等)、逻辑模块或软件。该方法包括:确定第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示多组配置信息,多组配置信息的触发条件不同。并发送第一指示信息。Secondly, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a second node, wherein the first node can be a device, component (e.g., processor, circuit, chip, or chip system), logic module, or software that implements some or all of the functions of the first node. The method includes: determining first indication information, the first indication information indicating multiple sets of configuration information, the multiple sets of configuration information having different triggering conditions; and sending the first indication information.
基于该方案,宿主节点或宿主节点的后代节点(即第二节点)可以为第一节点配置触发条件不同的多组配置信息(即宿主节点通过第一指示信息指示的多组配置信息);从而第一节点可以根据多组配置信息中的一组配置信息(即第一组配置信息)进行通信。Based on this scheme, the host node or its descendant node (i.e., the second node) can configure multiple sets of configuration information with different trigger conditions for the first node (i.e., multiple sets of configuration information indicated by the host node through the first indication information); thus, the first node can communicate based on one set of configuration information (i.e., the first set of configuration information).
示例性的,多组配置信息对应的触发条件可以分别与第一节点接入该宿主节点之后,重新接入网络(如重新接入该宿主节点或者新的宿主节点,或切换至其他宿主节点)的时间相关;从而第一节点重新接入网络的过程中,均会触发不同的配置信息;使得第一节点在接入该宿主节点之后,每次重新接入网络的过程中,存在一组配置信息生效,使得第一节点可以通过该一组配置信息进行通信。相较于第一节点每次接入网络的过程中,重新获取配置信息的方案,能够降低指示配置信息的信令开销。For example, the triggering conditions corresponding to multiple sets of configuration information can be related to the time when the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the host node (such as reconnecting to the host node or a new host node, or switching to another host node). Therefore, different configuration information will be triggered during each reconnection process of the first node. This ensures that each time the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the host node, one set of configuration information is in effect, allowing the first node to communicate using this set of configuration information. Compared to the scheme where the first node reacquires configuration information each time it connects to the network, this reduces the signaling overhead of instructing the configuration information.
在一种可能的设计中,确定第一指示信息,包括:接收来自第二节点的父节点的第一指示信息,第二节点父节点的位于宿主节点,或者,第二节点父节点的位于宿主节点的后代节点。In one possible design, determining the first indication information includes: receiving first indication information from the parent node of the second node, wherein the parent node of the second node is located on the host node, or the parent node of the second node is a descendant node of the host node.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信方法还包括:接收第二指示信息,第二指示信息指示第一节点的能力信息。In one possible design, the communication method further includes receiving second indication information, which indicates the capability information of the first node.
其中,第二方面的任一种可能的设计所带来的技术效果,可参考上述第一方面中相应的设计所带来的技术效果,在此不再赘述。The technical effects of any possible design in the second aspect can be referenced to the technical effects of the corresponding design in the first aspect, and will not be elaborated here.
结合第一方面或第二方面,还包括如下可能的设计:In conjunction with the first or second aspect, the following possible designs also include:
在一些可能的设计中,第一节点的能力信息包括以下至少一项信息:第一节点的类型,第一节点的类型为非地面节点或地面节点,地面节点包括静止节点或移动节点,非地面节点包括静止节点或移动节点;第一节点所属的IAB节点是否支持服务子节点;第一节点与第一节点所属的IAB节点中的MT是否支持同时切换;第一节点所属的IAB节点是否支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能。In some possible designs, the capability information of the first node includes at least one of the following: the type of the first node, which is either a non-ground node or a ground node; ground nodes include stationary nodes or mobile nodes; non-ground nodes include stationary nodes or mobile nodes; whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes; whether the MT in the first node and the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports simultaneous switching; and whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports having the functions of both an IAB node and a host node.
基于该可能的设计,第一节点可以向宿主节点上报其能力信息,使得宿主节点或核心网能够根据该能力信息为第一节点配置合适的配置信息;如为第一节点配置合适的切换方式、接入资源等,从而提升移动性管理的有效性。Based on this possible design, the first node can report its capability information to the host node, enabling the host node or core network to configure appropriate configuration information for the first node based on this capability information; such as configuring appropriate handover methods and access resources for the first node, thereby improving the effectiveness of mobility management.
在一种可能的设计中,第二指示信息还指示能力信息的生效时段,和/或,能力信息的生效区域。In one possible design, the second instruction information also indicates the effective period of the capability information and/or the effective area of the capability information.
基于该可能的设计,第一节点还可以向宿主节点上报其能力信息的生效时段和/或生效区域,使得宿主节点或核心网能够根据能力信息的生效时段和/或生效区域,为第一节点配置合适的配置信息;如为第一节点配置合适用于触发其不同功能的触发时段和/或出发事件,从而提升移动性管理的有效性。Based on this possible design, the first node can also report the effective period and/or effective area of its capability information to the host node, so that the host node or core network can configure appropriate configuration information for the first node according to the effective period and/or effective area of the capability information; such as configuring appropriate triggering periods and/or triggering events for the first node to trigger its different functions, thereby improving the effectiveness of mobility management.
在一些可能的设计中,多组配置信息中的任意一组配置信息指示以下至少一项信息:标识、触发条件、第一节点的覆盖范围、第一路径的信息、第一节点的地址信息、第一节点的寻呼区域、第一类参考信号配置信息、或第二类参考信号配置信息;其中,触发条件用于触发配置信息,第一路径为第一节点与第一节点接入的宿主节点之间的传输路径,第一类参考信号配置信息用于传输第一参考信号,第二类参考信号配置信息用于传输第二参考信号。In some possible designs, any one of the multiple sets of configuration information indicates at least one of the following: identifier, trigger condition, coverage area of the first node, information of the first path, address information of the first node, paging area of the first node, configuration information of the first type of reference signal, or configuration information of the second type of reference signal; wherein, the trigger condition is used to trigger the configuration information, the first path is the transmission path between the first node and the host node to which the first node is connected, the configuration information of the first type of reference signal is used to transmit the first reference signal, and the configuration information of the second type of reference signal is used to transmit the second reference signal.
在一些可能的设计中,第一组配置信息指示的触发条件可以包括以下至少一项:第一节点的本地时钟位于第一时段内;第一节点与参考位置之间的距离小于或等于第一阈值;第一节点与参考位置之间的角度小于或等于第二阈值。In some possible designs, the triggering conditions indicated by the first set of configuration information may include at least one of the following: the local clock of the first node is within a first time period; the distance between the first node and the reference position is less than or equal to a first threshold; the angle between the first node and the reference position is less than or equal to a second threshold.
在一些可能的设计中,配置信息指示第一节点的覆盖范围,包括:第一组配置信息指示至少一个小区,第一节点管理的小区包括至少一个小区,第一节点的覆盖范围包括至少一个小区的覆盖范围。In some possible designs, the configuration information indicates the coverage area of the first node, including: the first set of configuration information indicates at least one cell, the cells managed by the first node include at least one cell, and the coverage area of the first node includes the coverage area of at least one cell.
在一些可能的设计中,配置信息指示第一节点的寻呼区域,包括:配置信息指示至少一个跟踪区域码TAC,第一节点的寻呼区域包括至少一个TAC对应的至少一个跟踪区域TA;和/或,配置信息指示至少一个无线接入区域码RAC,第一节点的寻呼区域包括至少一个TAC对应的至少一个无线接入区域RA。In some possible designs, the configuration information indicates the paging area of the first node, including: the configuration information indicates at least one Tracking Area Code (TAC), and the paging area of the first node includes at least one Tracking Area (TA) corresponding to at least one TAC; and/or, the configuration information indicates at least one Radio Access Area Code (RAC), and the paging area of the first node includes at least one Radio Access Area (RA) corresponding to at least one TAC.
在一些可能的设计中,第一参考信号的周期为第一周期,第二参考信号为非周期信号或第二参考信号的周期为第二周期,第二周期大于第一周期。In some possible designs, the period of the first reference signal is the first period, and the period of the second reference signal is either a non-periodic signal or the period of the second reference signal is the second period, which is greater than the first period.
在一些可能的设计中,第一参考信号和第二参考信号为同步信号/物理层广播信道块SSB信号;第一参考信号映射至第一类型的时域位置,第一类型的时域位置满足第一周期;第二参考信号映射至第二类型的时域位置,第二类型的时域位置为非周期性的或者满足第二周期,第二周期大于第一周期。In some possible designs, the first reference signal and the second reference signal are synchronization signals/physical layer broadcast channel block (SSB) signals; the first reference signal is mapped to a first type of time-domain location, which satisfies a first period; the second reference signal is mapped to a second type of time-domain location, which is either aperiodic or satisfies a second period, which is greater than the first period.
基于上述两种可能的设计,由于第一参考信号的周期小于第二参考信号的周期;或者,第一参考信号为周期信号,第二参考信号为非周期信号;因此第一节点可以基于参考信号的周期区分第一参考信号与第二参考信号,避免参考信号间的干扰。Based on the two possible designs mentioned above, since the period of the first reference signal is less than the period of the second reference signal; or, the first reference signal is a periodic signal and the second reference signal is an aperiodic signal; therefore, the first node can distinguish between the first reference signal and the second reference signal based on the period of the reference signal, thus avoiding interference between the reference signals.
可以理解的是,在移动场景中,终端设备切换小区(如IAB节点,或IAB-DU)的频率明显高于IAB节点、IAB-MT或IAB-DU(如第一节点)切换其接入的宿主节点的频率。因此,对于第一节点而言,其发送用于终端设备的小区搜索的参考信号的频率高于发送用于搜索宿主节点的参考信号的频率;也就是说,用于小区搜索的SSB的周期较短。从而,第一节点可以将第一参考信号用于小区搜素,将第二参考信号用于宿主节点的搜索;相较于第一参考信号与第二参考信号采用相同周期(如均采用第一参考信号的周期)的方案能够节省资源。Understandably, in mobile scenarios, the frequency with which terminal devices switch cells (e.g., IAB nodes, or IAB-DUs) is significantly higher than the frequency with which IAB nodes, IAB-MTs, or IAB-DUs (e.g., the first node) switch their access to a host node. Therefore, for the first node, the frequency with which it sends reference signals for cell search of the terminal device is higher than the frequency with which it sends reference signals for searching for the host node; that is, the period of the SSB used for cell search is shorter. Thus, the first node can use the first reference signal for cell search and the second reference signal for host node search; this saves resources compared to using the same period for both the first and second reference signals (e.g., both using the period of the first reference signal).
在一些可能的设计中,第一参考信号与第二参考信号的信号类型不同。In some possible designs, the first reference signal and the second reference signal have different signal types.
在一些可能的设计中,第一参考信号和第二参考信号的时域位置、频域位置或极化方式中至少一项不同。In some possible designs, the time-domain location, frequency-domain location, or polarization of the first and second reference signals are different.
在一些可能的设计中,第一参考信号对应预定义的时域位置;第二参考信号的时域位置可变。In some possible designs, the first reference signal corresponds to a predefined time-domain position; the time-domain position of the second reference signal is variable.
基于上述三种可能的设计,第一节点可以向各节点(即除第一节点之外的其他节点)发送第一参考信号和/或第二参考信号的节点;各节点可以基于参考信号的类型、周期、时域位置等区分第一参考信号与第二参考信号。示例性的,第一参考信号与第二参考信号可以分别用于不同的业务;从而避免参考信号之间的干扰。Based on the three possible designs described above, the first node can send the first reference signal and/or the second reference signal to each other node (i.e., nodes other than the first node); each node can distinguish between the first reference signal and the second reference signal based on the type, period, time domain location, etc. of the reference signal. For example, the first reference signal and the second reference signal can be used for different services, thereby avoiding interference between the reference signals.
在一些可能的设计中,第一参考信号和第二参考信号满足准共址关系。In some possible designs, the first reference signal and the second reference signal satisfy a quasi-co-address relationship.
基于该可能的设计,第一参考信号和第二参考信号可以满足准共址关系,使得第一节点可以根据第一参考信号和第二参考信号进行联合的信道估计,从而提高信道估计的精确度。Based on this possible design, the first reference signal and the second reference signal can satisfy a quasi-co-location relationship, enabling the first node to perform joint channel estimation based on the first reference signal and the second reference signal, thereby improving the accuracy of channel estimation.
在一些可能的设计中,第一类型的时域位置和第二类型的时域位置复用相同的SSB索引。In some possible designs, the first type of time-domain location and the second type of time-domain location reuse the same SSB index.
基于该可能的设计,由于第一参考信号映射至第一类型的时域位置,第二参考信号映射至第二类型的时域位置,从而在第一类型的时域位置和第二类型的时域位置复用相同的SSB索引时,表示第一参考信号和第二参考信号满足准共址关系,因此第一节点可以根据第一类型的时域位置和第二类型的时域位置间接指示第一参考信号和第二参考信号满足准共址关系,从而减少指示准共址关系的信令开销。Based on this possible design, since the first reference signal is mapped to a first type of time domain location and the second reference signal is mapped to a second type of time domain location, when the first type of time domain location and the second type of time domain location reuse the same SSB index, it indicates that the first reference signal and the second reference signal satisfy a quasi-co-location relationship. Therefore, the first node can indirectly indicate that the first reference signal and the second reference signal satisfy a quasi-co-location relationship based on the first type of time domain location and the second type of time domain location, thereby reducing the signaling overhead of indicating the quasi-co-location relationship.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在一些可能的设计中,第一指示信息承载于无线资源控制RRC信令、F1-接入点AP消息、或Xn-AP消息中的任一项中。In conjunction with the first or second aspect, in some possible designs, the first indication information is carried in any one of the following: Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, F1-Access Point (AP) message, or Xn-AP message.
第三方面,提供了一种通信装置用于实现各种方法。该通信装置可以为第一方面中的第一节点;或者,该通信装置可以为第二方面中的第二节点。所述通信装置包括实现方法相应的模块、单元、或手段(means),该模块、单元、或means可以通过硬件实现,软件实现,或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与功能相对应的模块或单元。Thirdly, a communication device is provided for implementing various methods. This communication device can be a first node in the first aspect; or, it can be a second node in the second aspect. The communication device includes modules, units, or means corresponding to the implementation of the methods, which can be implemented in hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the functions.
在一些可能的设计中,该通信装置可以包括处理模块和收发模块。该处理模块,可以用于实现上述任一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的处理功能。收发模块可以包括接收模块和发送模块,分别用以实现上述任一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的接收功能和发送功能。In some possible designs, the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module. The processing module can be used to implement the processing functions in any of the above aspects and any possible implementations thereof. The transceiver module may include a receiving module and a transmitting module, respectively used to implement the receiving function and the transmitting function in any of the above aspects and any possible implementations thereof.
在一些可能的设计中,收发模块可以由收发电路,收发机,收发器或者通信接口构成。In some possible designs, the transceiver module can consist of transceiver circuits, transceivers, transceivers, or communication interfaces.
第四方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:处理器和存储器;该存储器用于存储计算机指令,当该处理器执行该指令时,以使该通信装置执行任一方面所述的方法。该通信装置可以为第一方面中的第一节点或第二方面中的第二节点。所述通信装置包括实现方法相应的模块、单元、或手段(means),该模块、单元、或means可以通过硬件实现,软件实现,或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与功能相对应的模块或单元。Fourthly, a communication device is provided, comprising: a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store computer instructions, which, when executed by the processor, cause the communication device to perform the method described in any aspect. The communication device may be a first node in the first aspect or a second node in the second aspect. The communication device includes modules, units, or means for implementing the method, which may be implemented in hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the function.
第五方面,提供一种通信装置,包括:处理器和通信接口;该通信接口,用于与该通信装置之外的模块通信;所述处理器用于执行计算机程序或指令,以使该通信装置执行任一方面所述的方法。该通信装置可以为第一方面中的第一节点或第二方面中的第二节点。所述通信装置包括实现方法相应的模块、单元、或手段(means),该模块、单元、或means可以通过硬件实现,软件实现,或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与功能相对应的模块或单元。Fifthly, a communication device is provided, comprising: a processor and a communication interface; the communication interface being used to communicate with a module outside the communication device; the processor being used to execute a computer program or instructions to cause the communication device to perform the method described in any aspect. The communication device may be a first node in the first aspect or a second node in the second aspect. The communication device includes modules, units, or means corresponding to the implementation of the method, which may be implemented in hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the functions.
或者,该接口电路可以为代码/数据读写接口电路,该接口电路用于接收计算机执行指令(计算机执行指令存储在存储器中,可能直接从存储器读取,或可能经过其他器件)并传输至该处理器,以使该处理器运行计算机执行指令以执行上述任一方面所述的方法。Alternatively, the interface circuit can be a code/data read/write interface circuit, which receives computer execution instructions (which are stored in memory and may be read directly from memory or may be transmitted through other devices) and transmits them to the processor so that the processor runs the computer execution instructions to perform the methods described in any of the above aspects.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置还包括存储器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令。可选地,处理器和存储器集成在一起,或者,处理器和存储器分开设置。In one possible design, the communication device also includes a memory for storing computer programs or instructions. Optionally, the processor and memory are integrated together, or the processor and memory are separate.
在一种可能的设计中,该存储器与处理器耦合,且在该通信装置之外。In one possible design, the memory is coupled to the processor and is located outside the communication device.
第六方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:至少一个处理器;所述处理器用于执行计算机程序或指令,以使该通信装置执行任一方面所述的方法。该通信装置可以为第一方面中的第一节点或第二方面中的第二节点。所述通信装置包括实现方法相应的模块、单元、或手段(means),该模块、单元、或means可以通过硬件实现,软件实现,或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与功能相对应的模块或单元。A sixth aspect provides a communication device, comprising: at least one processor; the processor being configured to execute a computer program or instructions to cause the communication device to perform the method described in any aspect. The communication device may be a first node in the first aspect or a second node in the second aspect. The communication device includes modules, units, or means for implementing the method, which may be implemented in hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the function.
在一些可能的设计中,该通信装置包括存储器,该存储器,用于保存必要的程序指令和数据。该存储器可以与处理器集成在一起,或者,也可以独立于该处理器。In some possible designs, the communication device includes a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data. This memory can be integrated with the processor, or it can be independent of the processor.
在一些可能的设计中,该装置是芯片系统时,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In some possible designs, when the device is a chip system, it can be composed of chips or contain chips and other discrete components.
可以理解的是,第四方面至第七方面中任一方面提供的通信装置是芯片时,通信装置的发送动作/功能可以理解为输出信息,通信装置的接收动作/功能可以理解为输入信息。It is understandable that when the communication device provided in any of the fourth to seventh aspects is a chip, the sending action/function of the communication device can be understood as outputting information, and the receiving action/function of the communication device can be understood as inputting information.
第七方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令,当其在通信装置上运行时,使得通信装置可以执行任一方面所述的方法。In a seventh aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided that stores a computer program or instructions that, when executed on a communication device, enable the communication device to perform the method described in any aspect.
第八方面,提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在通信装置上运行时,使得该通信装置可以执行任一方面所述的方法。In an eighth aspect, a computer program product containing instructions is provided, which, when run on a communication device, enables the communication device to perform the method described in either aspect.
第九方面,提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统包括该通信装置可以为第一方面中的第一节点或第二方面中的第二节点。In a ninth aspect, a communication system is provided, the communication system including the communication device being either a first node in the first aspect or a second node in the second aspect.
其中,第三方面至第九方面中任一种设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见上述第一方面或第二方面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果,在此不再赘述。The technical effects of any of the design methods in aspects three through nine can be found in the technical effects of different design methods in aspects one or two above, and will not be repeated here.
图1为本申请提供的一种IAB通信架构的示意图;Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of an IAB communication architecture provided in this application;
图2为本申请提供的又一种IAB通信架构的示意图;Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of another IAB communication architecture provided in this application;
图3为本申请提供的又一种IAB通信架构的示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of another IAB communication architecture provided in this application;
图4为本申请提供的一种初始接入的流程示意图;Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of an initial access process provided in this application;
图5为本申请提供的又一种初始接入的流程示意图;Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of another initial access process provided in this application;
图6为本申请提供的一种基于卫星的通信架构的示意图;Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of a satellite-based communication architecture provided in this application;
图7为本申请提供的一种通信系统的结构示意图;Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication system provided in this application;
图8为本申请提供的一种开放式接入网络O-RAN中网络设备的结构示意图;Figure 8 is a schematic diagram of the network equipment in an Open Access Network (O-RAN) provided in this application;
图9为本申请提供的一种O-RAN中各单元功能划分的示意图;Figure 9 is a schematic diagram of the functional division of each unit in an O-RAN provided in this application;
图10为本申请提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图;Figure 10 is a flowchart illustrating a communication method provided in this application;
图11为本申请提供的又一种通信系统的结构示意图;Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of another communication system provided in this application;
图12为本申请提供的一种第一参考信号和第二参考信号的示意图;Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of a first reference signal and a second reference signal provided in this application;
图13为本申请提供的又一种第一参考信号和第二参考信号的示意图;Figure 13 is a schematic diagram of another first reference signal and second reference signal provided in this application;
图14为本申请提供的又一种通信系统的结构示意图;Figure 14 is a schematic diagram of another communication system provided in this application;
图15为本申请提供的又一种第一参考信号和第二参考信号的示意图;Figure 15 is a schematic diagram of another first reference signal and second reference signal provided in this application;
图16为本申请提供的又一种通信方法的流程示意图;Figure 16 is a flowchart illustrating another communication method provided in this application;
图17为本申请提供的又一种通信系统的结构示意图;Figure 17 is a schematic diagram of another communication system provided in this application;
图18为本申请提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;Figure 18 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in this application;
图19为本申请提供的又一种通信装置的结构示意图;Figure 19 is a structural schematic diagram of another communication device provided in this application;
图20为本申请提供的又一种通信装置的结构示意图。Figure 20 is a structural schematic diagram of another communication device provided in this application.
在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示前后关联的对象是一种“或”的关系,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;本申请中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。In the description of this application, unless otherwise stated, "/" indicates that the objects before and after are in an "or" relationship. For example, A/B can mean A or B. "And/or" in this application is merely a description of the relationship between the related objects, indicating that there can be three relationships. For example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. A and B can be singular or plural.
在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。In the description of this application, unless otherwise stated, "multiple" means two or more. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item or a plurality of items. For example, at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, and c can be single or multiple.
另外,为了便于清楚描述本申请实施例的技术方案,在本申请的实施例中,采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分。本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定,并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。Furthermore, to facilitate a clear description of the technical solutions in the embodiments of this application, the terms "first" and "second" are used in the embodiments of this application to distinguish identical or similar items with substantially the same function and effect. Those skilled in the art will understand that the terms "first" and "second" do not limit the quantity or execution order, and the terms "first" and "second" are not necessarily different.
在本申请实施例中,“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请实施例中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念,便于理解。In the embodiments of this application, the terms "exemplary" or "for example" are used to indicate that something is an example, illustration, or description. Any embodiment or design that is described as "exemplary" or "for example" in the embodiments of this application should not be construed as being more preferred or advantageous than other embodiments or design. Specifically, the use of terms such as "exemplary" or "for example" is intended to present the relevant concepts in a specific manner to facilitate understanding.
可以理解,说明书通篇中提到的“实施例”意味着与实施例有关的特定特征、结构或特性包括在本申请的至少一个实施例中。因此,在整个说明书各个实施例未必指相同的实施例。此外,这些特定的特征、结构或特性可以任意适合的方式结合在一个或多个实施例中。可以理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It is understood that the term "embodiment" used throughout the specification means that a specific feature, structure, or characteristic related to an embodiment is included in at least one embodiment of this application. Therefore, various embodiments throughout the specification do not necessarily refer to the same embodiment. Furthermore, these specific features, structures, or characteristics can be combined in any suitable manner in one or more embodiments. It is understood that in the various embodiments of this application, the sequence number of each process does not imply the order of execution; the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of this application.
可以理解,在本申请中,“…时”以及“若”均指在某种客观情况下会做出相应的处理,并非是限定时间,且也不要求实现时要有判断的动作,也不意味着存在其它限定。It is understood that in this application, "...when" and "if" both refer to the corresponding processing that will be carried out under certain objective circumstances, and are not limited to a specific time, nor do they require a judgment action to be performed during implementation, nor do they imply any other limitations.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的一些可选的特征,在某些场景下,可以不依赖于其他特征,比如其当前所基于的方案,而独立实施,解决相应的技术问题,达到相应的效果,也可以在某些场景下,依据需求与其他特征进行结合。相应的,本申请实施例中给出的装置也可以相应的实现这些特征或功能,在此不予赘述。It is understood that some optional features in the embodiments of this application can be implemented independently in certain scenarios without relying on other features, such as the current solution on which they are based, to solve the corresponding technical problems and achieve the corresponding effects. Alternatively, they can be combined with other features as needed in certain scenarios. Correspondingly, the apparatus given in the embodiments of this application can also implement these features or functions, which will not be elaborated here.
可以理解,在本申请中,“用于指示”可以包括直接指示和间接指示,也可以包括显式指示和隐式指示。当描述“某一指示信息用于指示A”或“A的指示信息”时,可以包括该指示信息直接指示A或间接指示A,而并不代表该指示信息中一定携带有A。将某一信息所指示的信息称为待指示信息,则具体实现过程中,对待指示信息进行指示的方式有很多种,例如但不限于,可以直接指示待指示信息,如待指示信息本身或者该待指示信息的索引等。也可以通过指示其他信息来间接指示待指示信息,其中该其他信息与待指示信息之间存在关联关系。还可以仅仅指示待指示信息的一部分,而待指示信息的其他部分则是已知的或者提前约定的。例如,可以借助预先约定(例如协议规定)的各个信息的排列顺序来实现对特定信息的指示,从而在一定程度上降低指示开销。同时,还可以识别各个信息的通用部分并统一指示,以降低单独指示同样的信息而带来的指示开销。此外,具体的指示方式还可以是现有各种指示方式,例如但不限于,上述指示方式及其各种组合等。各种指示方式的具体细节可以参考现有技术,本文不再赘述。由上文所述可知,举例来说,当需要指示相同类型的多个信息时,可能会出现不同信息的指示方式不相同的情形。具体实现过程中,可以根据具体的需要选择所需的指示方式,本申请实施例对选择的指示方式不做限定,如此一来,本申请实施例涉及的指示方式应理解为涵盖可以使得待指示方获知待指示信息的各种方法。待指示信息可以作为一个整体一起发送,也可以分成多个子信息分开发送,而且这些子信息的发送周期或发送时机可以相同,也可以不同。具体发送方法本申请不进行限定。其中,这些子信息的发送周期或发送时机可以是预先定义的,例如根据协议预先定义的,也可以是发射端设备通过向接收端设备发送配置信息来配置的。It is understood that in this application, "used for indication" can include direct and indirect indication, as well as explicit and implicit indication. When describing "a certain indication information is used to indicate A" or "indication information of A," it can include whether the indication information directly or indirectly indicates A, but does not necessarily mean that the indication information carries A. The information indicated by a certain piece of information is called the information to be indicated. In the specific implementation process, there are many ways to indicate the information to be indicated, such as, but not limited to, directly indicating the information to be indicated, such as the information to be indicated itself or its index. It can also indirectly indicate the information to be indicated by indicating other information, where there is a correlation between the other information and the information to be indicated. It can also indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, while the other parts are known or pre-agreed. For example, the indication of specific information can be achieved by using a pre-agreed (e.g., protocol-defined) arrangement of various information, thereby reducing the indication overhead to some extent. At the same time, the common parts of various information can be identified and indicated uniformly to reduce the indication overhead caused by individually indicating the same information. Furthermore, the specific indication method can also be any existing indication method, such as, but not limited to, the above-mentioned indication methods and their various combinations. Specific details of various indication methods can be found in existing technologies and will not be repeated here. As mentioned above, for example, when multiple pieces of information of the same type need to be indicated, different indication methods may be used for different pieces of information. In specific implementation, the required indication method can be selected according to specific needs. This application embodiment does not limit the selected indication method. Therefore, the indication methods involved in this application embodiment should be understood to cover various methods that enable the party to be indicated to know the information to be indicated. The information to be indicated can be sent as a whole or divided into multiple sub-information and sent separately. Moreover, the sending period or sending time of these sub-information can be the same or different. This application does not limit the specific sending method. The sending period or sending time of these sub-information can be predefined, for example, predefined according to the protocol, or configured by the transmitting device by sending configuration information to the receiving device.
本申请中,除特殊说明外,各个实施例之间相同或相似的部分可以互相参考。在本申请中各个实施例如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。以下所述的本申请实施方式并不构成对本申请保护范围的限定。In this application, unless otherwise specified, the same or similar parts between the various embodiments can be referred to each other. Unless otherwise specified or logically conflicting, the terminology and/or descriptions between different embodiments are consistent and can be mutually referenced. Different embodiments can be combined to form new embodiments based on their inherent logical relationships. The following descriptions of the embodiments of this application do not constitute a limitation on the scope of protection of this application.
为了方便理解本申请实施例的技术方案,首先给出本申请相关技术的简要介绍如下。To facilitate understanding of the technical solutions of the embodiments of this application, a brief introduction to the relevant technologies of this application is given below.
1、非陆地网络(non-terrestrial networks,NTN):1. Non-terrestrial networks (NTN):
第五代(5th generation,5G)新无线(new radio,NR)技术正在从版本18(release 18,Rle18/R18)向R19演进。与此同时,NR技术已经从标准化阶段进入到商业部署阶段。NR标准协议的研究初中是为地面蜂窝网络场景设计的无线通信技术,能够为用户提供低时延、超可靠性、超高速率、超量连接的无线通信服务。不过蜂窝网络无法做到全球无缝覆盖,例如海面区域、极地区域、雨林等没有地面基站的区域,无法为蜂窝网络覆盖的区域提供语音和数据服务。Fifth-generation (5G) new radio (NR) technology is evolving from release 18 (R18/R18) to R19. Simultaneously, NR technology has moved from the standardization phase to commercial deployment. The initial research on the NR standard protocol was for wireless communication technologies designed for terrestrial cellular network scenarios, capable of providing users with low latency, ultra-reliability, ultra-high speed, and massive connectivity wireless communication services. However, cellular networks cannot achieve seamless global coverage. For example, in areas without terrestrial base stations, such as ocean areas, polar regions, and rainforests, voice and data services cannot be provided to areas covered by cellular networks.
相比于陆地通信,NTN通信具有全球覆盖、远距离传输、组网灵活、部署方便和不受地理条件限制等显著优点,已经被广泛应用于海上通信、定位导航、抗险救灾、科学实验、视频广播和对地观测等多个领域。NTN网络可以和地面网络融合,取长补短,共同构成全球无缝覆盖的海、陆、空、天、地一体化综合通信网,满足用户无处不在的多种业务需求。Compared to terrestrial communications, NTN communications offer significant advantages such as global coverage, long-distance transmission, flexible networking, convenient deployment, and freedom from geographical limitations. It has been widely applied in various fields including maritime communications, positioning and navigation, disaster relief, scientific experiments, video broadcasting, and Earth observation. NTN networks can be integrated with terrestrial networks, leveraging their respective strengths to create a seamless, globally integrated sea, land, air, space, and ground communications network, meeting the diverse and ubiquitous service needs of users.
按照飞行平台距离地面的高度,NTN可以包括低空平台(low altitude platform,LAP)子网(LAP subnetwork)、高空平台(high altitude platform,HAP)子网(HAP subnetwork)、以及卫星通信子网(SATCOM subnetwork)。Depending on the altitude of the flight platform above the ground, the NTN can include a low-altitude platform (LAP) subnetwork, a high-altitude platform (HAP) subnetwork, and a satellite communication subnetwork.
示例性的,LAP subnetwork中,基站或基站功能部署于距离地面0.1km至1km的低空飞行平台(例如无人机)上为终端提供覆盖;HAP subnetwork中,基站或基站功能部署于距离地面8km至50km的高空飞行平台(例如飞机)上为终端提供覆盖;SATCOM subnetwork中,基站或基站功能部署于距离地面50km以上的卫星上为终端提供覆盖。其中,卫星通信具有全球覆盖、远距离传输、组网灵活、部署方便和不受地理位置限制等显著优点,已经被广泛应用于海上通信、定位导航、抗险救灾、科学实验、视频广播、对地观测等多个领域。For example, in a LAP subnetwork, base stations or base station functions are deployed on low-altitude flight platforms (e.g., drones) at an altitude of 0.1km to 1km above the ground to provide coverage for terminals; in a HAP subnetwork, base stations or base station functions are deployed on high-altitude flight platforms (e.g., aircraft) at an altitude of 8km to 50km above the ground to provide coverage for terminals; and in a SATCOM subnetwork, base stations or base station functions are deployed on satellites at an altitude of more than 50km above the ground to provide coverage for terminals. Satellite communication, with its significant advantages such as global coverage, long-distance transmission, flexible networking, convenient deployment, and lack of geographical limitations, has been widely applied in various fields including maritime communication, positioning and navigation, disaster relief, scientific experiments, video broadcasting, and Earth observation.
进一步的,按照卫星的轨道高度,可以将卫星通信系统分为地球静止轨道(geostationary earth orbit,GEO)卫星通信系统、中地球轨道(medium earth orbit,MEO)卫星通信系统和低地球轨道(low-earth orbit,LEO)卫星通信系统。Furthermore, based on the satellite's orbital altitude, satellite communication systems can be divided into geostationary orbit (GEO) satellite communication systems, medium earth orbit (MEO) satellite communication systems, and low earth orbit (LEO) satellite communication systems.
在卫星通信中,根据波束的工作模式,通常可以分为非凝视模式(earth-moving)和凝视(earth-fixed或quasi-earth fixed)模式。此外,卫星通常通过星间链路(Inter-satellite link,ISL)或星地链路实现信息的传输。其中,ISL是指用于卫星之间通信的链路,也可以称为星际链路或交叉链路(crosslink)。也就是说,ISL指的是卫星和卫星之间通信的链路。星地链路是指用于卫星与部署于地面的中继节点之间通信的链路。In satellite communication, based on the beam's operating mode, it can generally be divided into non-staring mode (earth-moving) and staring mode (earth-fixed or quasi-earth fixed). Furthermore, satellites typically transmit information via inter-satellite links (ISL) or satellite-to-ground links. ISL refers to the link used for communication between satellites; it can also be called an inter-satellite link or crosslink. In other words, ISL refers to the link for communication between satellites. A satellite-to-ground link refers to the link used for communication between a satellite and a relay node deployed on the ground.
应理解,本申请实施例中提及的卫星,可以为卫星基站,也可包括用于对信息进行中继的轨道接收机或中继器,或者为搭载在卫星上的网络侧设备。It should be understood that the satellite mentioned in the embodiments of this application may be a satellite base station, or may include an orbital receiver or repeater for relaying information, or a network-side device mounted on a satellite.
2、接入回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul,IAB):2. Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB):
随着虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)以及物联网等技术的发展,未来网络中将会有越来越多的终端,网络数据的使用量也会不断攀升。为了配合越来越多的终端以及市场极速增长的网络数据使用量,目前对网络的容量提出了更高的要求。在热点区域,为满足超高容量需求,利用高频小站组网愈发流行。高频载波传播特性较差,受遮挡衰减严重,覆盖范围不广,故而在热点区域需要大量密集部署小站,然而,为大量密集部署的小站提供光纤回传的成本高、施工难度大,因此需要经济便捷的回传方案,而IAB技术为解决该问题提供了思路。在使用IAB技术解决上述问题时,这些小站可以称为IAB节点。With the development of technologies such as virtual reality (VR), augmented reality (AR), and the Internet of Things (IoT), there will be an increasing number of terminals in the future network, and the usage of network data will continue to rise. To accommodate the increasing number of terminals and the rapidly growing network data usage, higher demands are being placed on network capacity. In hotspot areas, the use of high-frequency small cell networks is becoming increasingly popular to meet ultra-high capacity requirements. High-frequency carriers have poor propagation characteristics, suffer severe attenuation due to obstruction, and have limited coverage. Therefore, a large number of small cells need to be deployed densely in hotspot areas. However, providing fiber optic backhaul for a large number of densely deployed small cells is costly and difficult to implement. Therefore, an economical and convenient backhaul solution is needed, and IAB technology provides a solution to this problem. When using IAB technology to solve the above problems, these small cells can be called IAB nodes.
为了设计灵活便利的接入和回传方案,IAB场景中的接入链路(access link,AL)和BH均采用无线传输方案和NR空口协议,示例性的,本申请实施例中的接入链路一般指无线接入链路,回传链路一般指无线回传链路,在此统一说明,下述实施例中不再赘述。To design flexible and convenient access and backhaul solutions, both the access link (AL) and BH in the IAB scenario adopt wireless transmission schemes and NR air interface protocols. For example, the access link in the embodiments of this application generally refers to the wireless access link, and the backhaul link generally refers to the wireless backhaul link. This will be explained uniformly here and will not be repeated in the following embodiments.
在包含IAB节点的网络(以下简称IAB网络)中,IAB节点可以为终端提供无线接入服务,并通过无线回传链路连接到IAB宿主(或IAB donor,以下简称宿主节点)传输用户的业务数据。In a network containing IAB nodes (hereinafter referred to as an IAB network), IAB nodes can provide wireless access services to terminals and connect to the IAB host (or IAB donor, hereinafter referred to as the host node) via a wireless backhaul link to transmit user service data.
IAB节点经IAB宿主通过有线链路连接到核心网。例如,在独立组网的5G架构下,IAB节点经宿主节点通过有线链路连接到5G网络的核心网(5G core,5GC)。在非独立组网的5G架构下,IAB节点在控制面经演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNB)连接到演进分组核心网(evolved packet core,EPC),在用户面经宿主节点以及eNB连接到EPC。IAB nodes connect to the core network via wired links through the IAB host. For example, in a standalone 5G architecture, IAB nodes connect to the 5G network core (5G core, 5GC) via wired links through the host node. In a non-standalone 5G architecture, IAB nodes connect to the evolved packet core (EPC) via evolved NodeBs (eNBs) on the control plane, and to the EPC via the host node and eNBs on the user plane.
为了保证IAB网络的覆盖性能以及业务传输的可靠性,IAB网络支持多跳IAB节点和多连接IAB节点组网。因此,在IAB节点服务的终端和宿主节点之间可能存在多条传输路径。在一条传输路径上可能包括多个节点,例如终端、一个或多个IAB节点、宿主节点。IAB节点之间,以及IAB节点和为IAB节点服务的宿主节点有确定的层级关系,每个IAB节点将为其提供回传服务的节点视为父节点。相应地,每个IAB节点可视为其父节点的子节点。也就是说,本申请实施例中,IAB节点的父节点是为该IAB节点提供回传服务的节点。相应的,该IAB节点可以视为其父节点的子节点。To ensure the coverage performance and service transmission reliability of the IAB network, the IAB network supports multi-hop IAB nodes and multi-connection IAB nodes. Therefore, multiple transmission paths may exist between the terminal served by an IAB node and the host node. A single transmission path may include multiple nodes, such as a terminal, one or more IAB nodes, and a host node. There is a defined hierarchical relationship between IAB nodes, and between IAB nodes and the host nodes serving them. Each IAB node considers the node providing backhaul services to it as its parent node. Correspondingly, each IAB node can be considered a child node of its parent node. That is, in this embodiment, the parent node of an IAB node is the node providing backhaul services to that IAB node. Accordingly, that IAB node can be considered a child node of its parent node.
此外,本申请实施例中将IAB节点的上层节点(例如,IAB节点的父节点,IAB节点的父节点的父节点,或者IAB节点a(假设IAB节点a为IAB节点的父节点的父节点)的父节点)视为该IAB节点的祖先节点,相应的,将IAB节点的下层节点(例如,IAB节点的子节点,IAB节点的子节点的子节点,或者IAB节点b(假设IAB节点b为IAB节点的子节点的子节点)的子节点)视为该IAB节点的子孙节点或后代节点。Furthermore, in this embodiment, the upper-level node of the IAB node (e.g., the parent node of the IAB node, the parent node of the parent node of the IAB node, or the parent node of IAB node a (assuming IAB node a is the parent node of the parent node of the IAB node)) is regarded as the ancestor node of the IAB node. Correspondingly, the lower-level node of the IAB node (e.g., the child node of the IAB node, the child node of the child node of the IAB node, or the child node of IAB node b (assuming IAB node b is the child node of the child node of the IAB node)) is regarded as the descendant node or offspring node of the IAB node.
示例性的,如图1所示,在IAB独立(standalone,SA)组网场景中,IAB节点#1的父节点为宿主节点,IAB节点#1又为IAB节点#2和IAB节点#3的父节点,IAB节点#2和IAB节点#3均为IAB节点#4的父节点,IAB节点#5的父节点为IAB节点#2。来自终端的数据包可以经一个或多个IAB节点传输至宿主节点后,再由宿主节点发送至移动网关设备(例如5G网络中的用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)网元),宿主节点接收到来自移动网关设备的数据包后,可以经一个或多个IAB节点发送至终端。For example, as shown in Figure 1, in an IAB standalone (SA) networking scenario, the parent node of IAB node #1 is the host node. IAB node #1 is also the parent node of IAB nodes #2 and #3. IAB nodes #2 and #3 are both the parent nodes of IAB node #4, and the parent node of IAB node #5 is IAB node #2. Data packets from the terminal can be transmitted to the host node via one or more IAB nodes, and then sent by the host node to the mobile gateway device (e.g., a user plane function (UPF) element in a 5G network). After receiving the data packets from the mobile gateway device, the host node can send them to the terminal via one or more IAB nodes.
在图1所示的网络中,终端1和宿主节点之间数据包的传输有两条可用的路径,分别为:终端#1→IAB节点#4→IAB节点#3→IAB节点#1→宿主节点,终端#1→IAB节点#4→IAB节点#2→IAB节点#1→宿主节点。终端#2和宿主节点之间数据包的传输有三条可用的路径,分别为:终端#2→IAB节点#4→IAB节点#3→IAB节点#1→宿主节点,终端#2→IAB节点#4→IAB节点#2→IAB节点#1→宿主节点,终端#2→IAB节点#5→IAB节点#2→IAB节点#1→宿主节点。In the network shown in Figure 1, there are two available paths for data packet transmission between Terminal 1 and the host node: Terminal #1 → IAB Node #4 → IAB Node #3 → IAB Node #1 → Host Node, and Terminal #1 → IAB Node #4 → IAB Node #2 → IAB Node #1 → Host Node. There are three available paths for data packet transmission between Terminal #2 and the host node: Terminal #2 → IAB Node #4 → IAB Node #3 → IAB Node #1 → Host Node, Terminal #2 → IAB Node #4 → IAB Node #2 → IAB Node #1 → Host Node, and Terminal #2 → IAB Node #5 → IAB Node #2 → IAB Node #1 → Host Node.
可以理解的是,在IAB网络中,终端和宿主节点之间的一条传输路径上,可以包含一个或多个IAB节点。每个IAB节点需要维护面向父节点的无线回传链路,还需要维护和子节点的无线链路。若一个IAB节点是终端接入的节点,该IAB节点和子节点(即终端)之间是无线接入链路。若一个IAB节点是为其他IAB节点提供回传服务的节点,该IAB节点和子节点(即其他IAB节点)之间是回传链路。Understandably, in an IAB network, a transmission path between a terminal and the host node can contain one or more IAB nodes. Each IAB node needs to maintain a radio backhaul link to its parent node and also maintain radio links with its child nodes. If an IAB node is the node through which a terminal accesses, the link between that IAB node and its child nodes (i.e., the terminal) is a radio access link. If an IAB node is the node that provides backhaul services to other IAB nodes, the link between that IAB node and its child nodes (i.e., the other IAB nodes) is a backhaul link.
示例性的,参见图1,在路径“终端#1→IAB节点#4→IAB节点#3→IAB节点#1→宿主节点”中。终端#1通过无线接入链路接入IAB节点#4,IAB节点#4通过无线回传链路接入IAB节点#3,IAB节点#3通过无线回传链路接入IAB节点#1,IAB节点#1通过无线回传链路接入宿主节点。For example, referring to Figure 1, in the path "Terminal #1 → IAB Node #4 → IAB Node #3 → IAB Node #1 → Host Node", Terminal #1 accesses IAB Node #4 via a wireless access link, IAB Node #4 accesses IAB Node #3 via a wireless backhaul link, IAB Node #3 accesses IAB Node #1 via a wireless backhaul link, and IAB Node #1 accesses the host node via a wireless backhaul link.
示例性的,IAB节点可以是用户驻地设备(customer premises equipment,CPE)、家庭网关(residential gateway,RG)等设备。该情况下,本申请实施例提供的方法还可以应用于家庭连接(home access)的场景中。For example, the IAB node can be a customer premises equipment (CPE), a residential gateway (RG), or other similar devices. In this case, the method provided in this application embodiment can also be applied to home access scenarios.
上述IAB独立组网场景仅仅是示例性的,在多跳和多连接结合的IAB场景中,IAB独立组网场景还有更多其他的可能性,例如,宿主节点和另一宿主节点下的IAB节点组成双连接为终端服务等,此处不再一一列举。The above-mentioned IAB standalone networking scenario is merely an example. In IAB scenarios that combine multi-hop and multi-connection, there are many other possibilities for IAB standalone networking, such as a host node and an IAB node under another host node forming a dual connection to provide terminal services, etc., which will not be listed here.
此外,IAB网络还支持非独立(non-standalone,NSA)组网;示例性的,IAB节点可以支持第四代(4th generation,4G)和5G双连接(E-UTRAN NR dual connectivity,EN-DC);和/或,IAB节点可以支持5G和6G EN-DC。以4G和5G EN-DC为例,如图2所示,eNB为IAB节点的主父节点,通过S1接口连接到EPC进行用户面和控制面传输。宿主节点为IAB节点的辅父节点,通过S1-U接口连接到EPC进行用户面传输。eNB与宿主节点通过X-2接口通信。类似的,终端同样支持EN-DC,例如,终端通过LTE的Uu口连接到终端的主基站eNB,通过NR的Uu口连接到终端的辅基站IAB节点。其中,终端的辅基站也可以是宿主节点。Furthermore, the IAB network also supports non-standalone (NSA) networking; for example, IAB nodes can support 4th generation (4G) and 5G dual connectivity (E-UTRAN NR dual connectivity, EN-DC); and/or, IAB nodes can support 5G and 6G EN-DC. Taking 4G and 5G EN-DC as an example, as shown in Figure 2, the eNB is the primary parent node of the IAB node, connected to the EPC via the S1 interface for user plane and control plane transmission. The host node is the secondary parent node of the IAB node, connected to the EPC via the S1-U interface for user plane transmission. The eNB and the host node communicate via the X-2 interface. Similarly, the terminal also supports EN-DC. For example, the terminal connects to its primary base station eNB via the LTE Uu interface and connects to its secondary base station IAB node via the NR Uu interface. The terminal's secondary base station can also be the host node.
上述IAB非独立组网场景仅仅是示例性的,在IAB非独立组网场景下同样支持多跳组网,例如,在IAB节点与宿主节点之间还可以包括一个或多个IAB节点,即IAB节点可用通过多跳无线回传链路连接到宿主节点等,此处不再一一列举。The above-described IAB non-standalone networking scenario is merely an example. Multi-hop networking is also supported in IAB non-standalone networking scenarios. For example, one or more IAB nodes can be included between the IAB node and the host node. That is, the IAB node can be connected to the host node through a multi-hop wireless backhaul link, etc., which will not be listed here.
在现有的IAB网络中,支持两种类型的网络拓扑:树状拓扑(tree based topology)和有向无环图(directedacyclic graph,DAG)拓扑。其中,当IAB网络的拓扑为树状拓扑时,每个IAB节点只有一个父节点,可以有一个或多个子节点;当IAB网络的拓扑为有向无环图拓扑时,每个IAB节点可以有一个或两个父节点,也可以有一个或多个子节点。The existing IAB network supports two types of network topologies: tree-based topology and directed acyclic graph (DAG) topology. When the IAB network has a tree-based topology, each IAB node has only one parent node and can have one or more child nodes. When the IAB network has a DAG topology, each IAB node can have one or two parent nodes and can also have one or more child nodes.
本申请实施例中,宿主节点可以为宿主基站。宿主节点在5G网络中可以简称为IAB宿主或DgNB(即donor gNodeB)。In this embodiment, the host node can be a host base station. In a 5G network, the host node can be simply referred to as an IAB host or DgNB (i.e., donor gNodeB).
宿主节点可以是一个完整的实体,还可以是集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)(本文中简称为donor-CU,也可以简称为CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)(本文中简称为donor-DU)分离的形态,即宿主节点由CU和DU组成;此时,也可以认为CU位于宿主节点,类似的,DU也位于宿主节点。The host node can be a complete entity, or it can be a separate form of a centralized unit (CU) (hereinafter referred to as donor-CU, or simply CU) and a distributed unit (DU) (hereinafter referred to as donor-DU). In this case, the host node is composed of CU and DU. Similarly, the CU can be considered to be located on the host node, and the DU is also located on the host node.
在5G中,IAB节点(例如IAB节点的DU)和宿主节点(或宿主节点的CU/DU)之间的逻辑接口为F1接口;F1接口也可以称为F1*接口,支持用户面以及控制面。F1接口的协议层是指在F1接口上的通信协议层。可以理解的是,在5G之后演进的场景(即下一代通信网络,如5.5G、6G等)中,IAB节点与宿主节点之间的逻辑接口也可以为除F1接口之外的其他接口,本申请实施例不予限制。In 5G, the logical interface between the IAB node (e.g., the DU of the IAB node) and the host node (or the CU/DU of the host node) is the F1 interface; the F1 interface can also be called the F1* interface, supporting both the user plane and the control plane. The protocol layer of the F1 interface refers to the communication protocol layer on the F1 interface. It is understood that in scenarios evolving after 5G (i.e., next-generation communication networks, such as 5.5G, 6G, etc.), the logical interface between the IAB node and the host node can also be other interfaces besides the F1 interface, and this application embodiment does not impose such limitations.
本申请实施例中,IAB节点由移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)和DU组成。IAB节点可以通过其MT(或者,也可以写为IAB-MT)与该IAB节点的至少一个父节点之间建立回传连接;此时,也可以认为IAB-MT位于IAB节点;该IAB节点也可以被看做是终端或者用户设备(user equipment,UE)。IAB节点的DU(或者,也可以称为IAB-DU)可以为终端或其他IAB节点的MT提供接入服务。此时,也可以认为IAB-DU位于IAB节点;IAB节点可以被看做是网络设备。In this embodiment, the IAB node consists of a mobile terminal (MT) and a DU. The IAB node can establish a backhaul connection with at least one parent node of the IAB node through its MT (or, it can also be written as IAB-MT); in this case, IAB-MT can also be considered to be located within the IAB node; the IAB node can also be considered as a terminal or user equipment (UE). The DU of the IAB node (or, it can also be called IAB-DU) can provide access services to the terminal or the MT of other IAB nodes. In this case, IAB-DU can also be considered to be located within the IAB node; the IAB node can be considered as a network device.
示例性的,参见图3,终端通过IAB节点#2和IAB节点#1连接到宿主节点。其中,IAB节点#1和IAB节点#2均由DU和MT组成。IAB节点#2的DU为终端提供接入服务。IAB节点#1的DU为IAB节点#2的MT提供接入服务。宿主节点的DU为IAB节点#1的MT提供接入服务。For example, referring to Figure 3, the terminal connects to the host node through IAB node #2 and IAB node #1. Both IAB node #1 and IAB node #2 consist of a DU and a MT. The DU of IAB node #2 provides access services to the terminal. The DU of IAB node #1 provides access services to the MT of IAB node #2. The DU of the host node provides access services to the MT of IAB node #1.
现有的IAB网络中,在无线回传链路引入了回传适配协议(backhaul adaptation protocol,BAP)层,BAP层位于无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层之上,可用于实现数据包在无线回传链路的路由以及承载映射等功能。In existing IAB networks, a backhaul adaptation protocol (BAP) layer has been introduced into the wireless backhaul link. The BAP layer is located above the radio link control (RLC) layer and can be used to implement functions such as packet routing and bearer mapping in the wireless backhaul link.
当IAB节点由MT和DU组成(或IAB节点包括MT和DU)时,MT和DU可以共用BAP层,也可以不共用BAP层,即MT和DU分别具有BAP层,其中,每个BAP层可以包括一个或多个BAP层实体,每个BAP层实体可以包括发送部分(tansmitting part)和接收部分(receiving entity),其中BAP层实体的发送部分也可以称为BAP层发送实体(transmitting entity)或BAP层实体的发送实体,BAP层实体的接收部分也可以称为BAP层接收实体(receiving entity)或BAP层实体的接收实体。When an IAB node consists of MT and DU (or an IAB node includes MT and DU), MT and DU may share the BAP layer or not. That is, MT and DU each have their own BAP layer. Each BAP layer may include one or more BAP layer entities. Each BAP layer entity may include a transmitting part and a receiving entity. The transmitting part of the BAP layer entity may also be called the transmitting entity or the receiving entity of the BAP layer entity.
3、NR中的初始接入:3. Initial Access in NR:
在SA组网场景中,如图4所示,NR中的初始接入可以包括如下步骤:In an SA network scenario, as shown in Figure 4, the initial access in NR may include the following steps:
1):UE执行小区搜索与选择。具体的,UE与小区(如基站)取得下行同步,并选择信号质量最佳的小区驻留。1): The UE performs cell search and selection. Specifically, the UE achieves downlink synchronization with the cell (such as the base station) and selects the cell with the best signal quality to camp on.
示例性的,UE可以执行小区搜索并获取同步信号,其中,同步信号包括主同步信号(primary synchronization signal,PSS)和辅助同步信号(secondary synchronization signal,SSS);从而根据不同信号识别小区并与之同步时序,即实现下行同步。For example, the UE can perform cell search and obtain synchronization signals, which include a primary synchronization signal (PSS) and a secondary synchronization signal (SSS); thereby identifying cells and synchronizing timing with them based on different signals, that is, achieving downlink synchronization.
2):UE向基站(即UE选择的最佳小区所属的基站)发起随机接入。具体的,UE可以通过随机接入过程与该小区建立上行同步,并获得上行资源。2): The UE initiates random access to the base station (i.e., the base station to which the best cell selected by the UE belongs). Specifically, the UE can establish uplink synchronization with the cell and obtain uplink resources through the random access procedure.
示例性的,UE可以发送随机接入过程中的前导码(preamble),该小区所属的基站可以根据前导码调整其时钟,使得UE与基站的传输时序对齐,即实现上行同步。For example, the UE can send a preamble during the random access process. The base station to which the cell belongs can adjust its clock according to the preamble to align the transmission timing of the UE with that of the base station, thus achieving uplink synchronization.
3):UE与基站之间进行RRC连接建立。3): The UE establishes an RRC connection with the base station.
示例性的,UE可以向基站发送无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)建立请求(RRC setup request)消息;基站接收到RRC建立请求消息之后,可以向UE响应RRC建立(RRC setup)消息。For example, a UE can send a Radio Resource Control (RRC) Setup Request message to a base station; after receiving the RRC Setup Request message, the base station can respond to the UE with an RRC Setup message.
4):UE与基站之间进行初始上下文建立。或者,也可以认为是:UE通过基站与核心网(如5G核心网(5th generation core,5GC))之间进行上下文信息的建立。4): The UE establishes the initial context with the base station. Alternatively, it can be considered as the UE establishing context information with the core network (such as the 5G core network (5th generation core, 5GC)) through the base station.
示例性的,基站在做各项事件判决时,需要根据UE的上下文信息,才能确定最切合的判决结果;因此,可以认为UE的上下文信息用于提高基站的判决结果的准确性。For example, when making decisions on various events, the base station needs to rely on the context information of the UE to determine the most appropriate decision result; therefore, the context information of the UE can be considered as being used to improve the accuracy of the base station's decision results.
可选的,在UE存在数据业务需求时,还可以执行如下步骤:Optionally, when the UE has data service requirements, the following steps can also be performed:
5):UE与基站之间进行协议数据单元(protocol data unit,PDU)会话建立。或者,也可以认为是:UE通过基站与核心网之间进行PDU会话建立。其中,PDU会话用于在UE和数据网络(data network,DN)之间提供PDU连接,也就是说,支持在UE和DN之间进行PDU交换。5) The UE establishes a Protocol Data Unit (PDU) session with the base station. Alternatively, it can be considered as the UE establishing a PDU session with the core network through the base station. The PDU session provides a PDU connection between the UE and the data network (DN), meaning it supports PDU exchange between the UE and the DN.
4、IAB网络中的初始接入:4. Initial access in the IAB network:
在SA组网场景中,IAB节点接入网络可以包含IAB节点的MT(下面简称IAB-MT)接入网络和IAB节点的DU(下面简称IAB-DU)接入网络。具体的,如图5所示,IAB网络中的初始接入可以包括如下步骤:In an SA (Standalone) network scenario, the IAB node access network can include the IAB node's MT (hereinafter referred to as IAB-MT) access network and the IAB node's DU (hereinafter referred to as IAB-DU) access network. Specifically, as shown in Figure 5, the initial access in the IAB network can include the following steps:
1):IAB-MT接入网络。1): IAB-MT access network.
示例性的,IAB-MT可以执行宿主节点的搜索与选择(如选择信号质量最佳的宿主节点),随后可以向其选择的宿主节点发起随机接入,进一步的,可以与该宿主节点之间完成RRC连接建立,从而实现接入核心网(如5GC)。For example, IAB-MT can perform host node search and selection (such as selecting the host node with the best signal quality), and then initiate random access to the selected host node. Furthermore, it can establish an RRC connection with the host node to achieve access to the core network (such as 5GC).
示例性的,IAB-MT搜索宿主节点的过程中,在IAB-MT获取到的同步信号来自于宿主节点的情况下,IAB节点可以直接与宿主节点的连接,此时,在IAB节点接入网络后,宿主节点即为IAB节点的父节点。在IAB-MT获取到的同步信号来自于与宿主节点关联的IAB节点(如图5中的IAB节点')的情况下,IAB节点可以通过IAB节点'实现与宿主节点的连接,此时,在IAB节点接入网络后,该IAB节点'即为IAB节点的父节点。For example, during the IAB-MT's search for a host node, if the synchronization signal obtained by the IAB-MT comes from the host node, the IAB node can directly connect to the host node. In this case, after the IAB node accesses the network, the host node becomes the parent node of the IAB node. If the synchronization signal obtained by the IAB-MT comes from an IAB node associated with the host node (as shown by IAB node ' in Figure 5), the IAB node can connect to the host node through IAB node '. In this case, after the IAB node accesses the network, IAB node ' becomes the parent node of the IAB node.
与宿主节点关联的IAB节点,可以理解为:直接或间接与宿主节点连接的IAB节点;或者,也可以理解为:宿主节点的后代节点。例如,IAB节点通过IAB节点'连接至宿主节点,那么,可以认为IAB节点'直接与宿主节点连接,IAB节点间接与宿主节点连接,此时IAB'节点为宿主节点的子节点,也就是说,IAB'节点为宿主节点的后代节点。An IAB node associated with a host node can be understood as either a node directly or indirectly connected to the host node, or a descendant node of the host node. For example, if an IAB node is connected to the host node through an IAB node', then it can be considered that the IAB node' is directly connected to the host node, or indirectly connected. In this case, the IAB' node is a child node of the host node, meaning it is a descendant node of the host node.
具体的,IAB-MT接入网络的实现过程与上述NR中的初始接入过程类似,具体可以参照上述相关描述,在此不再赘述。Specifically, the implementation process of the IAB-MT access network is similar to the initial access process in NR mentioned above. Please refer to the relevant descriptions above for details, which will not be repeated here.
示例性的,IAB-MT选择宿主节点,也可以理解为IAB-MT选择CU。IAB-MT选择的CU也可以称为RRC-terminating IAB-dornor-CU。从而在IAB-MT接入网络后,该CU可以服务IAB-MT。For example, the selection of a host node by the IAB-MT can also be understood as the selection of a CU by the IAB-MT. The CU selected by the IAB-MT can also be called the RRC-terminating IAB-dornor-CU. Thus, after the IAB-MT accesses the network, this CU can serve the IAB-MT.
可选的,在RRC连接建立之后,IAB节点还可以通过RRC建立完成(RRCSetupComplete)消息向网络(如核心网)指示其特征,如向网络指示其为IAB节点;使得网络能够根据该特征进行身份认证。Optionally, after the RRC connection is established, the IAB node can also indicate its characteristics to the network (such as the core network) through the RRC Setup Complete message, such as indicating to the network that it is an IAB node; so that the network can perform identity authentication based on the characteristics.
2):宿主节点建立与IAB节点之间的通信信道。2): The host node establishes a communication channel with the IAB node.
示例性的,宿主节点可以在与IAB节点之间的传输路径上建立一个或多个回传RLC信道。其中,在宿主节点与IAB节点之间的中间节点上分别建立BH RLC信道。For example, the host node can establish one or more backhaul RLC channels on the transmission path between the host node and the IAB node. Specifically, BH RLC channels are established on the intermediate nodes between the host node and the IAB node.
可选的,宿主节点还可以更新中间节点的BAP层的配置、BAP路径标识(identifier,ID)以及路由表更新。其中,BAP路径ID指示报文到达目的节点应当遵循的路由路径。Optionally, the host node can also update the BAP layer configuration, BAP path identifier (ID), and routing table updates of intermediate nodes. The BAP path ID indicates the routing path that a packet should follow to reach its destination node.
3):IAB-DU基于通信信道建立F1接口。3): IAB-DU establishes an F1 interface based on the communication channel.
示例性的,建立F1接口后,IAB-DU可以基于F1接口与宿主节点的通信,或者说,可以基于F1接口连接到网络。因此,步骤3)也可以理解为IAB-DU接入网络。此外,IAB-DU还可以为UE提供服务。For example, after establishing the F1 interface, the IAB-DU can communicate with the host node via the F1 interface, or in other words, it can connect to the network via the F1 interface. Therefore, step 3) can also be understood as the IAB-DU accessing the network. Furthermore, the IAB-DU can also provide services to the UE.
通常IAB-DU建立过程中,会释放原先的配置信息,并获取新的配置信息;并基于该新的配置信息实现通信。从而,在移动IAB(mobile IAB,mIAB)场景中,会触发IAB-DU频繁的切换其接入的宿主节点,进而造成IAB-DU的配置信息的频繁释放与更新,使得信令开销增加。During the establishment of an IAB-DU, the original configuration information is typically released, and new configuration information is acquired; communication is then established based on this new configuration information. Therefore, in mobile IAB (mIAB) scenarios, this triggers frequent switching of the host node to which the IAB-DU connects, leading to frequent release and updates of the IAB-DU's configuration information, thus increasing signaling overhead.
有鉴于此,本申请实施例提供的通信方法和装置,IAB-DU(即第一节点)接收其宿主节点配置的触发条件不同的多组配置信息(即宿主节点通过第一指示信息指示的多组配置信息);从而可以根据多组配置信息中的一组配置信息(即第一组配置信息)进行通信。In view of this, the communication method and apparatus provided in the embodiments of this application allow the IAB-DU (i.e., the first node) to receive multiple sets of configuration information with different trigger conditions configured by its host node (i.e., multiple sets of configuration information indicated by the host node through the first indication information); thereby, communication can be performed based on one set of configuration information (i.e., the first set of configuration information) among the multiple sets of configuration information.
示例性的,多组配置信息对应的触发条件可以分别与第一节点接入该宿主节点之后,重新接入网络(如重新接入该宿主节点或者新的宿主节点,或切换至其他宿主节点)的时间相关;从而第一节点重新接入网络的过程中,均会触发不同的配置信息;使得第一节点在接入该宿主节点之后,每次重新接入网络的过程中,存在一组配置信息生效,使得第一节点可以通过该一组配置信息进行通信。相较于第一节点每次接入网络的过程中,重新获取配置信息的方案,能够降低指示配置信息的信令开销。For example, the triggering conditions corresponding to multiple sets of configuration information can be related to the time when the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the host node (such as reconnecting to the host node or a new host node, or switching to another host node). Therefore, different configuration information will be triggered during each reconnection process of the first node. This ensures that each time the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the host node, one set of configuration information is in effect, allowing the first node to communicate using this set of configuration information. Compared to the scheme where the first node reacquires configuration information each time it connects to the network, this reduces the signaling overhead of instructing the configuration information.
本申请提供的技术方案可用于各种通信系统,该通信系统可以为卫星通信系统高空平台(high altitude platform station,HAPS)通信、无人机等NTN系统,例如,通信、导航一体化(integrated communication and navigation,IcaN)系统、全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS)和超密低轨卫星通信系统等。卫星通信系统可以与传统的移动通信系统相融合。例如:所述移动通信系统可以为第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)相关的蜂窝系统,例如,第四代(4th generation,4G)长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信系统、演进的LTE系统(LTE-Advanced,LTE-A)系统、5G NR系统、车联网(vehicle to everything,V2X)系统、LTE和NR混合组网的系统、或者设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)系统、机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)通信系统、物联网(internet of things,IoT),以及其他下一代通信系统,如第六代(6th generation,6G)通信系统等。The technical solution provided in this application can be used in various communication systems, including high-altitude platform station (HAPS) satellite communication systems, UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) NTN systems, such as integrated communication and navigation (ICAN) systems, global navigation satellite systems (GNSS), and ultra-dense low-Earth orbit (LEO) satellite communication systems. Satellite communication systems can be integrated with traditional mobile communication systems. For example, the mobile communication system can be a cellular system related to the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP), such as the 4th generation (4G) long term evolution (LTE) system, the worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) communication system, the evolved LTE system (LTE-Advanced, LTE-A) system, the 5G NR system, the vehicle to everything (V2X) system, the LTE and NR hybrid networking system, or the device-to-device (D2D) system, the machine-to-machine (M2M) communication system, the Internet of Things (IoT), and other next-generation communication systems, such as the 6th generation (6G) communication system.
或者,该通信系统也可以为非3GPP通信系统,例如,开放式接入网络(open radio access network,O-RAN或ORAN)、云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN),或者也可以是上述多中通信系统融合的通信系统,本申请不予限制。Alternatively, the communication system may be a non-3GPP communication system, such as an open radio access network (O-RAN or ORAN), a cloud radio access network (CRAN), or a communication system that integrates multiple of the above communication systems. This application does not impose any restrictions on this.
其中,上述适用本申请的通信系统和通信场景仅是举例说明,适用本申请的通信系统和通信场景不限于此,本申请提供的通信系统和通信场景对本申请的方案不造成任何限定,在此统一说明,以下不再赘述。The communication systems and scenarios applicable to this application mentioned above are merely illustrative examples. The communication systems and scenarios applicable to this application are not limited thereto. The communication systems and scenarios provided in this application do not impose any limitations on the solutions of this application. This is hereby stated uniformly and will not be repeated below.
本申请提供一种示例性的通信系统。该通信系统可以包括至少一个第一节点和至少一个第二节点。其中,第一节点和第二节点均位于IAB网络的节点中,且第二节点能够为第一节点提供服务。或者,也可以认为第二节点为第一节点的候选父节点。This application provides an exemplary communication system. The communication system may include at least one first node and at least one second node. Both the first and second nodes are located within a node of the IAB network, and the second node is capable of providing services to the first node. Alternatively, the second node may be considered a candidate parent node of the first node.
可选的,第一节点可以位于IAB节点;相应的,第二节点也可以位于IAB节点,或者,第二节点可以位于宿主节点。具体的,第一节点可以为IAB-DU,第二节点可以为第一节点的候选父节点的IAB-DU,或者,第二节点为IAB dornor-DU。Optionally, the first node can be located on an IAB node; correspondingly, the second node can also be located on an IAB node, or the second node can be located on the host node. Specifically, the first node can be an IAB-DU, and the second node can be an IAB-DU of the candidate parent node of the first node, or the second node can be an IAB dornor-DU.
示例性的,第一节点与第二节点之间的通信可以理解为:第一节点通过其所属的IAB节点的MT(即与第一节点关联的IAB-MT),与第二节点进行通信;相应的,第二节点也可以通过该MT与第一节点进行通信。For example, the communication between the first node and the second node can be understood as follows: the first node communicates with the second node through the MT of its IAB node (i.e., the IAB-MT associated with the first node); correspondingly, the second node can also communicate with the first node through the MT.
示例性的,IAB网络中的每个节点均可以服务至少一个终端设备,因此,第一节点所处的节点和第二节点所处的节点也可以分别服务至少一个终端设备,从而第一节点和第二节点也认为是网络设备。For example, each node in the IAB network can serve at least one terminal device. Therefore, the node where the first node is located and the node where the second node is located can also serve at least one terminal device respectively, so the first node and the second node are also considered to be network devices.
一种可能的实现方式中,第一节点和第二节点均部署于NTN。此时,也可以认为该通信系统应用于NTN场景中。In one possible implementation, both the first and second nodes are deployed on the NTN. In this case, the communication system can also be considered to be applied in an NTN scenario.
可选的,第一节点和第二节点可以部署于非地面平台,例如部署于低空平台(如无人机)、高空平台(如飞机)、或卫星中。Optionally, the first and second nodes can be deployed on non-ground platforms, such as low-altitude platforms (e.g., drones), high-altitude platforms (e.g., aircraft), or satellites.
示例性的,以第一节点和第二节点均部署于卫星,或者说第一节点和第二节点均为卫星为例,该通信系统还可以包括NTN网关(NTN gateway)(或称为关口站)。通常,NTN网关部署在地面。NTN网关可以与卫星进行通信,卫星与NTN网关之间的链路可以称为馈电链路(feeder link)。For example, assuming both the first and second nodes are deployed on satellites, or both are satellites, the communication system may also include an NTN gateway (or gateway station). Typically, the NTN gateway is deployed on the ground. The NTN gateway can communicate with the satellite, and the link between the satellite and the NTN gateway can be called a feeder link.
如图6中的(a)所示,在卫星作为无线中继节点,或者说卫星具有中继转发功能的情况下,NTN网关具有基站的功能或部分基站功能,此时NTN网关可以作为基站。或者,NTN网关可以与基站分开部署,即除了NTN网关外,该通信系统还包括基站。图6中以NTN网关和基站分开部署为例进行说明。As shown in Figure 6(a), when the satellite acts as a wireless relay node, or in other words, the satellite has relay forwarding capabilities, the NTN gateway has the functions of a base station or some of the functions of a base station. In this case, the NTN gateway can function as a base station. Alternatively, the NTN gateway can be deployed separately from the base station; that is, in addition to the NTN gateway, the communication system also includes a base station. Figure 6 illustrates this using the example of deploying the NTN gateway and base station separately.
如图6中的(b)所示,在卫星可以实现基站部分或全部功能的情况下,卫星具有数据处理能力,可以将卫星作为基站。此时,NTN网关和卫星可以通过卫星无线接口(satellite radio interface,SRI)传输终端设备的用户面数据。As shown in Figure 6(b), when a satellite can perform some or all of the functions of a base station, and has data processing capabilities, it can be used as a base station. In this case, the NTN gateway and the satellite can transmit user plane data of the terminal equipment through the satellite radio interface (SRI).
此外,卫星可以实现基站部分或全部功能的情况下,如图6中的(c)所示,不同卫星之间存在ISL,卫星之间可以通过ISL通信。或者,如图6中的(d)所示,卫星可以具有基站的DU处理功能,或者说卫星能够作为DU。该场景下,基站的CU处理功能可以部署在地面,CU和DU之间通过NTN网关使用F1接口通信。Furthermore, in cases where satellites can perform some or all of the functions of a base station, as shown in Figure 6(c), there are ISLs between different satellites, and satellites can communicate with each other via ISLs. Alternatively, as shown in Figure 6(d), a satellite can have the DU processing function of a base station, or in other words, a satellite can act as a DU. In this scenario, the CU processing function of the base station can be deployed on the ground, and the CU and DU communicate with each other via the F1 interface through an NTN gateway.
在图6(如图6中的(a)~图6中的(d))所示的架构中,NG指基站和核心网之间的接口。Uu指基站和终端设备之间的接口。Xn指基站之间的接口。可以理解的是,随着通信系统的演进,基站和核心网之间的接口名称、基站和终端设备之间的接口名称、以及基站之间的接口名称也可能发生变化,本申请对此不作具体限定。In the architecture shown in Figure 6 (as in Figure 6(a) to Figure 6(d)), NG refers to the interface between the base station and the core network. Uu refers to the interface between the base station and the terminal equipment. Xn refers to the interface between base stations. It is understood that as the communication system evolves, the names of the interfaces between the base station and the core network, between the base station and the terminal equipment, and between base stations may also change, and this application does not specifically limit them.
可选的,卫星作为无线中继节点,具有中继转发功能时,可以认为卫星工作在透传(transparent)模式下。卫星具有数据处理能力,能够实现基站部分或全部功能时,可以认为卫星工作在再生(regenerative)模式下。对于某个卫星,可以仅支持透传模式或仅支持再生模式,也可以支持透传模式和再生模式,并且能够在透传模式和再生模式之间进行切换。Optionally, when a satellite acts as a wireless relay node with relay forwarding capabilities, it can be considered to be operating in transparent mode. When a satellite has data processing capabilities and can perform some or all of the functions of a base station, it can be considered to be operating in regenerative mode. For a given satellite, it may support only transparent mode, only regenerative mode, or both transparent and regenerative modes, and it may be able to switch between transparent and regenerative modes.
另一种可能的实现方式中,第一节点可以部署于NTN,第二节点可以部署于地面。此时,也可以认为该通信系统应用于NTN和地面融合的场景中。In another possible implementation, the first node can be deployed on the NTN, and the second node can be deployed on the ground. In this case, the communication system can also be considered to be applied to a scenario where NTN and terrestrial networks are integrated.
示例性的,第一节点部署于NTN的实现可以参见上述实施例的相关描述,在此不再赘述。示例性的,第二节点可以部署为地面基站,或者,第二节点可以为地面基站。For example, the implementation of the first node deployed on the NTN can be found in the relevant description of the above embodiments, and will not be repeated here. For example, the second node can be deployed as a terrestrial base station, or the second node can be a terrestrial base station.
结合上述两种可能的实现方式,参见图7,为本申请提供的一种通信系统应用的架构。Combining the two possible implementation methods mentioned above, and referring to Figure 7, we have provided an architecture for a communication system application in this application.
在卫星通信中,卫星可以通过多波束向终端设备提供通信服务、导航服务和定位服务等。或者说,卫星可以采用多个波束覆盖其服务区域。示例性的,不同的波束可以通过时分复用、频分复用、空分复用和极化复用中的一种或多种进行通信。In satellite communications, satellites can provide communication, navigation, and positioning services to terminal devices using multiple beams. In other words, a satellite can use multiple beams to cover its service area. For example, different beams can communicate using one or more of time-division multiplexing, frequency-division multiplexing, space-division multiplexing, and polarization multiplexing.
波束在协议中的体现可以是空域滤波器(spatial domain filter),或者称空间滤波器(spatial filter),或称空域参数(spatial domain parameter),空间参数(spatial parameter),空域设置(spatial domain setting),空间设置(spatial setting),或准共址(Quasi-colocation,QCL)信息,QCL假设,QCL指示等。波束可以通过传输配置指示(transmission configuration indication,TCI)状态(TCI-state)参数来指示,或通过空间关系(spatial relation)参数来指示。因此,本申请中,波束可以替换为空域滤波器,空间滤波器,空域参数,空间参数,空域设置,空间设置,QCL信息,QCL假设,QCL指示,TCI-state,空间关系等。上述术语之间也相互等效。本申请中的波束也可以替换为其他表示波束的术语,本申请不作限定。In a protocol, beaming can be represented as a spatial domain filter, spatial filter, spatial domain parameter, spatial parameter, spatial domain setting, spatial setting, or quasi-colocation (QCL) information, QCL assumption, QCL indication, etc. Beaming can be indicated through transmission configuration indication (TCI) state parameters or spatial relation parameters. Therefore, in this application, beaming can be replaced by spatial domain filter, spatial filter, spatial parameter, spatial parameter, spatial setting, spatial setting, QCL information, QCL assumption, QCL indication, TCI-state, spatial relation, etc. These terms are also equivalent to each other. Beaming in this application can also be replaced with other beaming terms, and this application does not limit this.
如图7所示,卫星#1可以服务终端设备#1与终端设备#2,卫星#2可以服务终端设备#3,卫星#3可以服务终端设备#4。具体的,卫星可以通过广播通信信号和导航信号等与终端设备进行无线通信,此外,卫星也可以与NTN网关进行无线通信。As shown in Figure 7, satellite #1 can serve terminal devices #1 and #2, satellite #2 can serve terminal device #3, and satellite #3 can serve terminal device #4. Specifically, the satellites can communicate wirelessly with the terminal devices through broadcast communication signals and navigation signals, and they can also communicate wirelessly with the NTN gateway.
卫星可以与基站或NTN网关连接,从而实现终端设备与网络之间的通信。例如,卫星#1可以接入基站#1,实现基站#1和终端设备#1(和/或终端设备#2)的通信;或者,卫星#1可以通过卫星#2与卫星#3接入NTN网关,实现NTN网关和终端设备#1(和/或终端设备#2)的通信;或者,卫星#1可以通过卫星#2接入基站#2,实现基站#2和终端设备#1(和/或终端设备#2)的通信。其中,卫星#1、卫星#2以及卫星#3之间的通信链路为ISL。基站#1、基站#2、以及NTN网关均能够获取来自网络的信息,并能够向网络发送信息。也就是说,终端设备与基站或NTN网关的通信,也可以认为是终端设备与网络通信。Satellites can connect to base stations or NTN gateways to enable communication between terminal devices and the network. For example, satellite #1 can connect to base station #1 to enable communication between base station #1 and terminal device #1 (and/or terminal device #2); alternatively, satellite #1 can connect to the NTN gateway via satellite #2 or satellite #3 to enable communication between the NTN gateway and terminal device #1 (and/or terminal device #2); or satellite #1 can connect to base station #2 via satellite #2 to enable communication between base station #2 and terminal device #1 (and/or terminal device #2). The communication links between satellites #1, #2, and #3 are ISLs (Independent Links). Base station #1, base station #2, and the NTN gateway can all receive information from the network and send information to the network. In other words, communication between the terminal device and the base station or NTN gateway can also be considered as communication between the terminal device and the network.
类似的,卫星#2可以接入基站#2,实现基站#2和终端设备#3的通信;或者,卫星#2可以通过卫星#3接入NTN网关;实现NTN网关和终端设备#3的通信;或者,卫星#2可以通过卫星#1接入基站#1;实现基站#1和终端设备#3的通信。卫星#3可以接入NTN网关,实现NTN网关和终端设备#4的通信;或者,卫星#3可以接入基站#2,实现基站#2和终端设备#4的通信;或者,卫星#3可以通过卫星#2与卫星#1接入基站#1;实现基站#1和终端设备#3的通信。Similarly, satellite #2 can access base station #2 to enable communication between base station #2 and terminal device #3; or, satellite #2 can access the NTN gateway via satellite #3 to enable communication between the NTN gateway and terminal device #3; or, satellite #2 can access base station #1 via satellite #1 to enable communication between base station #1 and terminal device #3. Satellite #3 can access the NTN gateway to enable communication between the NTN gateway and terminal device #4; or, satellite #3 can access base station #2 to enable communication between base station #2 and terminal device #4; or, satellite #3 can access base station #1 via satellite #2 and satellite #1 to enable communication between base station #1 and terminal device #3.
将上述图7所示的通信系统应用于IAB网络中时,对于路径:终端设备#1(和/或终端设备#2)→卫星#1→基站#1;卫星#1可以作为IAB节点,基站#1可以作为宿主节点;此时,第一节点可以部署于卫星#1,第二节点部署于基站#1。对于路径:终端设备#1(和/或终端设备#2)→卫星#1→卫星#2→基站#2;卫星#1和卫星#2均可以作为IAB节点,基站#2可以作为宿主节点;此时,第一节点可以部署于卫星#1,第二节点部署于卫星#2。对于路径:终端设备#1(和/或终端设备#2)→卫星#1→卫星#2→卫星#3→NTN网关;卫星#1和卫星#2均可以作为IAB节点,卫星#3可以作为宿主节点;此时,第一节点可以部署于卫星#1,相应的,第二节点部署于卫星#2。When the communication system shown in Figure 7 is applied to an IAB network, for the path: Terminal device #1 (and/or Terminal device #2) → Satellite #1 → Base station #1; Satellite #1 can act as an IAB node, and Base station #1 can act as a host node; in this case, the first node can be deployed on satellite #1, and the second node can be deployed on base station #1. For the path: Terminal device #1 (and/or Terminal device #2) → Satellite #1 → Satellite #2 → Base station #2; Both satellite #1 and satellite #2 can act as IAB nodes, and base station #2 can act as a host node; in this case, the first node can be deployed on satellite #1, and the second node can be deployed on satellite #2. For the path: Terminal device #1 (and/or Terminal device #2) → Satellite #1 → Satellite #2 → Satellite #3 → NTN gateway; Both satellite #1 and satellite #2 can act as IAB nodes, and satellite #3 can act as a host node; in this case, the first node can be deployed on satellite #1, and correspondingly, the second node can be deployed on satellite #2.
类似的,对于路径:终端设备#3→卫星#2→基站#2;卫星#2可以作为IAB节点,基站#2可以作为宿主节点;此时,第一节点可以部署于卫星#2,第二节点部署于基站#2。对于路径:终端设备#3→卫星#2→卫星#1→基站#1;卫星#1和卫星#2均可以作为IAB节点,基站#1可以作为宿主节点;此时,第一节点可以部署于卫星#2,第二节点部署于卫星#1。对于路径:终端设备#3→卫星#2→卫星#3→NTN网关;卫星#2可以作为IAB节点,卫星#3可以作为宿主节点;此时,第一节点可以部署于卫星#2,相应的,第二节点部署于卫星#3。Similarly, for the path: Terminal Device #3 → Satellite #2 → Base Station #2; Satellite #2 can act as an IAB node, and Base Station #2 can act as a host node; in this case, the first node can be deployed on Satellite #2, and the second node can be deployed on Base Station #2. For the path: Terminal Device #3 → Satellite #2 → Satellite #1 → Base Station #1; Both Satellite #1 and Satellite #2 can act as IAB nodes, and Base Station #1 can act as a host node; in this case, the first node can be deployed on Satellite #2, and the second node can be deployed on Satellite #1. For the path: Terminal Device #3 → Satellite #2 → Satellite #3 → NTN Gateway; Satellite #2 can act as an IAB node, and Satellite #3 can act as a host node; in this case, the first node can be deployed on Satellite #2, and correspondingly, the second node can be deployed on Satellite #3.
对于路径:终端设备#4→卫星#3→基站#2;卫星#3可以作为IAB节点,基站#2可以作为宿主节点;此时,第一节点可以部署于卫星#3,第二节点部署于基站#2。对于路径:终端设备#4→卫星#3→卫星#2→卫星#1→基站#1;卫星#1、卫星#2以及卫星#3均可以作为IAB节点,基站#1可以作为宿主节点;此时,第一节点可以部署于卫星#3,第二节点部署于卫星#2。For the path: Terminal device #4 → Satellite #3 → Base station #2; Satellite #3 can act as an IAB node, and Base station #2 can act as a host node; in this case, the first node can be deployed on satellite #3, and the second node can be deployed on base station #2. For the path: Terminal device #4 → Satellite #3 → Satellite #2 → Satellite #1 → Base station #1; Satellite #1, Satellite #2, and Satellite #3 can all act as IAB nodes, and Base station #1 can act as a host node; in this case, the first node can be deployed on satellite #3, and the second node can be deployed on satellite #2.
可以理解的是,上述图6~图7所述架构中的卫星均可以替换为无人机、飞机等其他飞行平台上的非地面载荷。It is understandable that the satellites in the architecture described in Figures 6 and 7 above can be replaced by non-ground payloads on other flight platforms such as drones and airplanes.
可选的,本申请实施例中的网络设备是一种将终端设备接入到无线网络的设备,所述网络设备可以为无线接入网中的节点,又可以称为基站,还可以称为无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)节点(或设备)。例如,网络设备可以包括LTE系统或LTE-A系统中的演进型基站(NodeB或eNB或e-NodeB,evolutional Node B),如传统的宏基站eNB和异构网络场景下的微基站eNB。或者,可以包括下一代节点B(next generation node B,gNB)。或者,可以包括TRP、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(base band unit,BBU)、或基带池(BBU pool)等。或者,可以包括NTN中的基站,即可以部署于高空平台或者卫星,在NTN中,接入网设备可以作为层1(L1)中继(relay),或者可以作为基站,或者可以作为DU,或者可以作为IAB节点。或者,网络设备可以是IoT中实现基站功能的设备,例如V2X、D2D、或者机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)中实现基站功能的设备,或者,可以包括车载设备或可穿戴设备,或者,可以包括5G网络或者5G之后演进的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的网络设备,本申请实施例并不限定。Optionally, the network device in this application embodiment is a device that connects a terminal device to a wireless network. The network device can be a node in a radio access network, also known as a base station or a radio access network (RAN) node (or device). For example, the network device may include an evolved Node B (NodeB, eNB, or e-NodeB) in an LTE or LTE-A system, such as a traditional macro base station (eNB) or a micro base station (eNB) in a heterogeneous network scenario. Alternatively, it may include a next-generation node B (gNB). Alternatively, it may include a TRP, a home base station (e.g., a home evolved Node B, or a home Node B, HNB), a base band unit (BBU), or a base band pool. Alternatively, it may include a base station in an NTN, which can be deployed on a high-altitude platform or satellite. In an NTN, the access network device can act as a Layer 1 (L1) relay, a base station, a DU, or an IAB node. Alternatively, the network device can be a device that implements base station functions in IoT, such as V2X, D2D, or machine-to-machine (M2M) devices that implement base station functions. Alternatively, it can include in-vehicle devices or wearable devices. Alternatively, it can include network devices in 5G networks or public land mobile networks (PLMNs) that evolve from 5G. The embodiments of this application are not limited.
可选的,本申请实施例中的基站可以包括各种形式的基站,例如:宏基站、微基站(也称为小站)、中继站、接入点、家庭基站、TRP、发射点(transmission point,TP)、移动交换中心等,本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。Optionally, the base station in this application embodiment may include various forms of base stations, such as: macro base station, micro base station (also known as small station), relay station, access point, home base station, TRP, transmission point (TP), mobile switching center, etc. This application embodiment does not specifically limit these.
一些可能的场景中,本申请实施例中的网络设备还可以是能够实现基站部分功能的模块或单元,例如,网络设备可以是CU,DU,CU-控制面(control plane,CP),CU-用户面(user plane,UP),或者无线单元(radio unit,RU)等。CU和DU可以是单独设置,或者也可以包括在同一个网元(如BBU)中,即BBU可以包括至少一个CU和至少一个DU。RU可以包括在射频设备或者射频单元中;例如包括在射频拉远单元(remote radio unit,RRU)、有源天线处理单元(active antenna unit,AAU)或远程射频头(remote radio head,RRH)中。In some possible scenarios, the network device in this application embodiment can also be a module or unit capable of implementing some functions of a base station. For example, the network device can be a CU, DU, CU-control plane (CP), CU-user plane (UP), or radio unit (RU), etc. The CU and DU can be set separately, or they can be included in the same network element (such as BBU), that is, the BBU can include at least one CU and at least one DU. The RU can be included in radio equipment or radio unit; for example, it can be included in a remote radio unit (RRU), an active antenna unit (AAU), or a remote radio head (RRH).
在不同系统中,CU(或CU-CP和CU-UP)、DU或RU也可以有不同的名称,但是本领域的技术人员可以理解其含义。例如,在开放式接入网络(open radio access network,O-RAN或ORAN)系统中,CU还可以称为开放(open,O)-CU,DU还可以称为O-DU,CU-CP还可以称为O-CU-CP,CU-UP还可以称为O-CU-UP,RU还可以称为O-RU。为描述方便,本申请中以CU,CU-CP,CU-UP、DU和RU为例进行描述。本申请中的CU(或CU-CP、CU-UP)、DU和RU中的任一单元,可以是通过软件模块、硬件模块、或者软件模块与硬件模块结合来实现。In different systems, CU (or CU-CP and CU-UP), DU, or RU may have different names, but those skilled in the art will understand their meaning. For example, in an open radio access network (O-RAN or ORAN) system, CU can also be called open (O)-CU, DU can also be called O-DU, CU-CP can also be called O-CU-CP, CU-UP can also be called O-CU-UP, and RU can also be called O-RU. For ease of description, this application uses CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU, and RU as examples. Any of the units among CU (or CU-CP, CU-UP), DU, and RU in this application can be implemented through software modules, hardware modules, or a combination of software modules and hardware modules.
参见图8中的(a),为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信架构的示意图。如图8中的(a)所示,CU和DU包括在同一个BBU中,RU包括在射频单元中。此外,图8中的(a)所示的接入网设备可以通过BH链路与核心网(core network,CN)通信,接入网设备也可以通过空口与终端设备通信。具体的,接入网设备中的BBU通过BH链路与CN通信,接入网设备中的RU通过空口与至少一个终端设备通信。BBU就可以通过前传链路与至少一个RU通信,BBU和RU可以是共址的,或者也可以不是共址的。Referring to Figure 8(a), which is a schematic diagram of another communication architecture provided by an embodiment of this application, as shown in Figure 8(a), the CU and DU are included in the same BBU, and the RU is included in the radio frequency unit. Furthermore, the access network device shown in Figure 8(a) can communicate with the core network (CN) via a BH link, and the access network device can also communicate with the terminal device via an air interface. Specifically, the BBU in the access network device communicates with the CN via a BH link, and the RU in the access network device communicates with at least one terminal device via an air interface. The BBU can communicate with at least one RU via a fronthaul link; the BBU and RU may or may not be co-located.
参见图8中的(b),为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信框架的示意图。该通信系统中包括RAN智能控制器(RAN intelligent controller,RIC)。该RIC包括近实时RIC(near-real time RIC,near-RT RIC)和非实时RIC(non-real time RIC,Non-RT RIC)。其中,近实时RIC用于进行模型训练和推理。例如,用于训练人工智能(artificial intelligence,AI)模型,利用该AI模型进行推理。近实时RIC可以从接入网设备(例如CU、CU-CP、CU-UP、DU和/或RU)和/或终端设备获得网络侧和/或终端侧的信息。该信息可以作为训练数据或者推理数据。Referring to Figure 8(b), a schematic diagram of another communication framework provided in an embodiment of this application is shown. This communication system includes a RAN intelligent controller (RIC). The RIC includes a near-real-time RIC (near-RT RIC) and a non-real-time RIC (non-RT RIC). The near-real-time RIC is used for model training and inference. For example, it is used to train an artificial intelligence (AI) model and then use that AI model for inference. The near-real-time RIC can obtain network-side and/or terminal-side information from access network devices (e.g., CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU, and/or RU) and/or terminal devices. This information can be used as training data or inference data.
可选的,近实时RIC可以将推理结果递交给接入网设备和/或终端设备。可选的,CU和DU之间,和/或DU和RU之间可以交互推理结果。例如近实时RIC将推理结果递交给DU,DU将其发给RU。用于实现RAN的近实时智能管理。通过E2接口上的数据收集和相关操作,实现对O-RAN的模块和资源的近实时控制和优化。Optionally, the near real-time RIC can deliver inference results to access network devices and/or terminal devices. Optionally, inference results can be exchanged between the CU and DU, and/or between the DU and RU. For example, the near real-time RIC delivers inference results to the DU, and the DU sends them to the RU. This is used to achieve near real-time intelligent management of the RAN. Through data collection and related operations on the E2 interface, near real-time control and optimization of O-RAN modules and resources are achieved.
示例性的,非实时RIC用于进行模型训练和推理。例如,用于训练AI模型,利用该模型进行推理。非实时RIC可以从RAN节点(例如CU、CU-CP、CU-UP、DU和/或RU)和/或终端设备获得网络侧和/或终端侧的信息。该信息可以作为训练数据或者推理数据,该推理结果可以被递交给接入网设备和/或终端设备。可选的,CU和DU之间,和/或DU和RU之间可以交互推理结果,例如非实时RIC将推理结果递交给DU,由DU将其发给RU。For example, a non-real-time RIC is used for model training and inference. For instance, it can be used to train an AI model and then use that model for inference. The non-real-time RIC can obtain network-side and/or terminal-side information from RAN nodes (e.g., CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU, and/or RU) and/or terminal devices. This information can be used as training data or inference data, and the inference results can be delivered to the access network devices and/or terminal devices. Optionally, inference results can be exchanged between CUs and DUs, and/or between DUs and RUs; for example, the non-real-time RIC delivers the inference results to the DU, which then forwards them to the RU.
示例性的,近实时RIC与非实时RIC也可以分别作为一个网元单独设置。For example, near real-time RIC and non-real-time RIC can also be set up as separate network elements.
可选的,近实时RIC,非实时RIC也可以作为其他设备的一部分,例如,近实时RIC设置在接入网设备中(例如,CU,DU中),而非实时RIC设置在操作与维护(operations and maintenance,OAM)中、云服务器中、CN、或者其他接入网设备中。Optionally, near real-time RICs and non-real-time RICs can also be part of other devices. For example, near real-time RICs can be set in access network devices (e.g., CU, DU), while non-real-time RICs can be set in operations and maintenance (OAM), cloud servers, CN, or other access network devices.
示例性的,如图9所示,O-RAN汇聚单元(O-RAN central unit,O-CU):用于实现3GPP标准中无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)层、分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层、以及业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)层和其他控制功能。For example, as shown in Figure 9, the O-RAN central unit (O-CU) is used to implement the radio resource control (RRC) layer, packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer, and other control functions in the 3GPP standard.
O-RAN汇聚单元控制面(O-RAN central unit control plane,O-CU-CP):与NR系统中的CU-CP类似,用于实现RRC层的功能,以及PDCP层的控制面功能。属于O-CU的一部分。O-RAN Central Unit Control Plane (O-CU-CP): Similar to the CU-CP in the NR system, it is used to implement the functions of the RRC layer and the control plane functions of the PDCP layer. It is part of the O-CU.
O-RAN汇聚单元用户面(O-RAN central unit user plane,O-CU-UP):与NR系统中的CU-UP类似,用于实现SDAP层的功能、以及PDCP层的用户面功能。属于O-CU的一部分。O-RAN Central Unit User Plane (O-CU-UP): Similar to the CU-UP in the NR system, it is used to implement the functions of the SDAP layer and the user plane functions of the PDCP layer. It is part of the O-CU.
O-RAN分布单元(O-RAN distributed unit,O-DU):基于低层功能切分,用于实现3GPP标准中RLC层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层、和高物理层(higher physical layer,Higher PHY)。其中,高物理层功能包括以下至少一项:前馈纠错(forward error correction,FEC)编码/解码、加扰/解扰、或调制/解调。O-RAN distributed unit (O-DU): Based on low-layer function segmentation, it is used to implement the RLC layer, media access control (MAC) layer, and higher physical layer (Higher PHY) in the 3GPP standard. The higher physical layer functions include at least one of the following: forward error correction (FEC) encoding/decoding, scrambling/descrambling, or modulation/demodulation.
O-RAN射频单元(O-RAN radio unit,O-RU):基于低层功能切分,用于实现3GPP标准中低物理层(lowerphysical layer,Lower PHY)功能以及射频功能。其中,低物理层功能包括以下至少一项:快速傅里叶变换(fast fourier transform,FFT)变换/快速傅立叶反变换(inverse fast fourier transformation,iFFT)变换、数字波束赋形、或物理随机接入信道(Physical Random Access Channel,PRACH)的提取和滤波等。类似3GPP中的TRP或RRH,但却包括了低物理层功能,如FFT/iFFT、或PRACH的提取。The O-RAN radio unit (O-RU) is based on low-layer function partitioning and is used to implement the lower physical layer (PHY) functions and radio frequency (RF) functions in the 3GPP standard. The PHY functions include at least one of the following: Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)/Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (iFFT) transformation, digital beamforming, or extraction and filtering of the Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH). It is similar to the TRP or RRH in 3GPP, but includes low-PHY functions such as FFT/iFFT or PHY extraction.
可选的,本申请实施例中的终端设备,可以是用于实现无线通信功能的用户侧设备,例如终端或者可用于终端中的芯片等。其中,终端可以是5G网络或者5G之后演进的PLMN中的UE、MT、接入终端、卫星终端、终端单元、终端站、移动站(mobile station,MS)、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、无线通信设备、终端代理或终端装置等。接入终端可以是蜂窝电话(cellular phone)、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、智能电话(smart phone)(如手机)、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device,MID)、车载设备(例如,汽车、自行车、电动车、飞机、船舶、火车、高铁等)或可穿戴设备(例如智能手表、智能手环、计步器、智能眼镜等)、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、智能销售点(point of sale,POS)机、客户终端设备(customer-premises equipment,CPE)、轻型用户设备(light UE)、能力降低的用户设备(reduced capability UE,REDCAP UE)、智能家居(例如,冰箱、电视、空调、电表等)、工业控制(industrial5 control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(telemedicine或telehealth services)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、无线数据卡、平板型电脑(如平板电脑、掌上电脑等)、无线调制解调器(modem)、手持设备(handset)、膝上型电脑(laptop computer)(如笔记本电脑)、机器类型通信(machine type communication,MTC)终端(如智能机器人、机械臂、车间设备等)、飞行设备(例如,智能机器人、热气球、无人机、飞机)等。终端设备还可以是车辆装置,例如整车装置、车载模组、车载芯片、车载单元(on board unit,OBU)或车联网终端盒子(telematics box,T-BOX)等;或者,终端设备还可以是IoT中具有通信功能的终端,例如V2X中担任终端功能的设备(例如车联网设备)、D2D通信中担任终端功能的设备、或者M2M通信中担任终端功能的设备等。终端可以是移动的,也可以是固定的。Optionally, the terminal device in this application embodiment can be a user-side device used to implement wireless communication functions, such as a terminal or a chip that can be used in the terminal. The terminal can be a UE, MT, access terminal, satellite terminal, terminal unit, terminal station, mobile station (MS), mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, wireless communication device, terminal agent, or terminal apparatus in a 5G network or a PLMN evolved from 5G. Access terminals can be cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, smartphones (such as mobile phones), personal digital assistants (PDAs), handheld devices with wireless communication capabilities, computing devices or other processing devices connected to a wireless modem, mobile internet devices (MIDs), in-vehicle devices (e.g., cars, bicycles, electric vehicles, airplanes, ships, trains, high-speed trains, etc.) or wearable devices (e.g., smartwatches, smart bracelets, pedometers, smart glasses, etc.), virtual reality (VR) terminal devices, augmented reality (AR) terminal devices, point-of-sale (POS) machines, customer-premises equipment (CPE), and light user equipment (light Wireless terminals include: UE (User Equipment), reduced capability UE (REDCAP UE), smart home devices (e.g., refrigerators, televisions, air conditioners, electricity meters), wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in telemedicine or telehealth services, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, wireless data cards, tablet computers (e.g., tablets, PDAs), wireless modems, handsets, laptop computers (e.g., laptops), machine-type communication (MTC) terminals (e.g., intelligent robots, robotic arms, workshop equipment), and flying equipment (e.g., intelligent robots, hot air balloons, drones, airplanes). Terminal devices can also be vehicle-mounted devices, such as vehicle-mounted devices, in-vehicle modules, in-vehicle chips, on-board units (OBUs), or telematics boxes (T-BOXs); alternatively, terminal devices can be terminals with communication functions in IoT, such as devices that function as terminals in V2X (e.g., vehicle-to-everything devices), devices that function as terminals in D2D communication, or devices that function as terminals in M2M communication. Terminals can be mobile or fixed.
本申请的实施例对终端的设备形态不做限定,用于实现终端设备的功能的装置可以是终端设备;也可以是能够支持终端设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统。该装置可以被安装在终端设备中或者和终端设备匹配使用。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。本申请中的终端设备的全部或部分功能也可以通过在硬件上运行的软件功能来实现,或者通过平台(例如云平台)上实例化的虚拟化功能来实现。The embodiments of this application do not limit the form of the terminal device. The device used to implement the functions of the terminal device can be the terminal device itself, or it can be a device that supports the terminal device in implementing the functions, such as a chip system. The device can be installed in the terminal device or used in conjunction with the terminal device. In the embodiments of this application, the chip system can be composed of chips, or it can include chips and other discrete devices. All or part of the functions of the terminal device in this application can also be implemented by software functions running on hardware, or by virtualization functions instantiated on a platform (such as a cloud platform).
可选的,网络设备与终端设备之间、网络设备与网络设备之间、或者终端设备与终端设备之间可以通过授权频谱进行通信,或者可以通过免授权频谱进行通信,或者可以同时通过授权频谱和免授权频谱进行通信。Optionally, network devices and terminal devices, network devices and network devices, or terminal devices and terminal devices can communicate through licensed spectrum, or through unlicensed spectrum, or simultaneously through both licensed and unlicensed spectrum.
可选的,网络设备与终端设备之间、网络设备与网络设备之间、或者终端设备与终端设备之间可以通过6千兆赫(gigahertz,GHz)以下的频谱进行通信,或者可以通过6GHz以上的频谱进行通信,或者可以同时使用6GHz以下的频谱和6GHz以上的频谱进行通信。本申请的实施例对无线通信所使用的频谱资源不做限定。Optionally, communication between network devices and terminal devices, between network devices, or between terminal devices can be conducted using spectrum below 6 GHz, or using spectrum above 6 GHz, or simultaneously using spectrum below 6 GHz and spectrum above 6 GHz. The embodiments of this application do not limit the spectrum resources used for wireless communication.
下面将结合附图,对本申请实施例提供的通信方法进行展开说明。可以理解的,本申请实施例中,第一节点或第二节点可以执行本申请实施例中的部分或全部步骤,这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其它操作或者各种操作的变形。此外,各个步骤可以按照本申请实施例呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行本申请实施例中的全部操作。The communication method provided in the embodiments of this application will now be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. It is understood that in the embodiments of this application, the first node or the second node may execute some or all of the steps in the embodiments of this application. These steps or operations are merely examples, and the embodiments of this application may also execute other operations or variations thereof. Furthermore, the steps may be executed in different orders as presented in the embodiments of this application, and it is not necessary to execute all the operations in the embodiments of this application.
参见图10,为本申请提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图,该通信方法可以包括如下步骤S1001~S1002:Referring to Figure 10, which is a flowchart of a communication method provided in this application, the communication method may include the following steps S1001 to S1002:
S1001、第二节点向第一节点发送第一指示信息;相应的,第一节点接收来自第二节点的第一指示信息。其中,第一指示信息指示多组配置信息,多组配置信息分别用于第一节点的触发条件不同。S1001, the second node sends a first indication message to the first node; correspondingly, the first node receives the first indication message from the second node. The first indication message indicates multiple sets of configuration information, each set used for different triggering conditions of the first node.
可选的,第二节点可以位于宿主节点;或者,第二节点可以位于IAB节点,此时,第二节点可以为是宿主节点的后代节点。即第一节点可以通过第二节点实现与宿主节点的通信。Optionally, the second node can be located on the host node; or, the second node can be located on the IAB node, in which case the second node can be a descendant node of the host node. That is, the first node can communicate with the host node through the second node.
示例性的,第一节点接入第二节点之后,第二节点(或宿主节点)可以为第一节点发送配置信息;即上述步骤S1001在第一节点接入第二节点之后执行。For example, after the first node connects to the second node, the second node (or the host node) can send configuration information to the first node; that is, the above step S1001 is executed after the first node connects to the second node.
示例性的,第二节点位于宿主节点的情况下,第一节点接入第二节点可以理解为:第一节点接入宿主节点,或者说,第一节点接入网络。第二节点位于IAB节点的情况下,第一节点接入第二节点可以理解为:第一节点通过第二节点接入宿主节点,或者说,第一节点通过第二节点接入网络。For example, when the second node is located on the host node, the first node accessing the second node can be understood as the first node accessing the host node, or in other words, the first node accessing the network. When the second node is located on an IAB node, the first node accessing the second node can be understood as the first node accessing the host node through the second node, or in other words, the first node accessing the network through the second node.
示例性的,第一节点接入第二节点的实现可以参照上述IAB-DU接入网络的相关描述,在此不再赘述。For example, the implementation of the first node accessing the second node can refer to the relevant description of the IAB-DU access network mentioned above, and will not be repeated here.
可选的,第二节点可以通过广播或多播的方式,向第一节点发送第一指示信息。即第二节点位于宿主节点或IAB节点的情况下,第二节点可以通过广播或多播的方式,向第一节点发送第一指示信息。Optionally, the second node can send the first indication information to the first node via broadcast or multicast. That is, if the second node is located at the host node or IAB node, the second node can send the first indication information to the first node via broadcast or multicast.
可选的,在第二节点为IAB节点的情况下,第二节点可以从宿主节点获取第一指示信息。示例性的,宿主节点(如宿主节点的DU)可以通过单播的方式发送第一指示信息。示例性的,第一指示信息可以承载于RRC消息、F1-AP消息、或Xn-AP消息中的任一项中。Optionally, if the second node is an IAB node, the second node can obtain the first indication information from the host node. For example, the host node (such as the DU of the host node) can send the first indication information via unicast. For example, the first indication information can be carried in any of the following: an RRC message, an F1-AP message, or an Xn-AP message.
具体的,在第二节点位于宿主节点的后代节点(即第二节点位于IAB节点)的情况下,宿主节点(如宿主节点的DU)可以通过单播的方式向其子节点发送第一指示信息;若第二节点位于该子节点,即表示宿主节点向第二节点所处的IAB节点发送第一指示信息。若第二节点不位于该子节点,该子节点接收到第一指示信息之后,可以将该第一指示信息发送至该子节点的子节点,进一步的,使得第二节点能够接收到该第一指示信息。Specifically, when the second node is a descendant node of the host node (i.e., the second node is located on an IAB node), the host node (such as the host node's DU) can send the first indication information to its child node via unicast. If the second node is located on that child node, it means the host node is sending the first indication information to the IAB node where the second node is located. If the second node is not located on that child node, after receiving the first indication information, the child node can send the first indication information to its child nodes, further enabling the second node to receive the first indication information.
可选的,第一节点可以为地面节点或非地面节点;类似的,第二节点也可以为地面节点或非地面节点;其中,地面节点包括静止节点或移动节点,非地面节点包括静止节点或移动节点。Optionally, the first node can be a ground node or a non-ground node; similarly, the second node can also be a ground node or a non-ground node; wherein, ground nodes include stationary nodes or mobile nodes, and non-ground nodes include stationary nodes or mobile nodes.
示例性的,本申请实施例中,地面节点指的是部署于地面的节点;相应的,非地面节点指的是部署于非地面的节点。例如,非地面节点可以部署于卫星、低空平台(如无人机)、或高空平台(如飞机)中。For example, in the embodiments of this application, a ground node refers to a node deployed on the ground; correspondingly, a non-ground node refers to a node deployed on a location other than the ground. For example, a non-ground node can be deployed on a satellite, a low-altitude platform (such as a drone), or a high-altitude platform (such as an aircraft).
静止节点指的是相对于地面静止不动的节点。因此,地面节点为静止节点,指的是部署于地面、且相对于地面静止不动的节点;非地面节点为静止节点,指的是部署于非地面、但是相对于地面静止不动的节点。A stationary node is a node that remains stationary relative to the ground. Therefore, a ground node is a stationary node, meaning a node deployed on the ground that remains stationary relative to the ground; a non-ground node is a stationary node, meaning a node deployed off the ground that remains stationary relative to the ground.
移动节点指的是相对于地面移动的节点。因此,地面节点为移动节点,指的是部署于地面、且相对于地面移动的节点(例如,部署于移动的车辆中的节点);非地面节点为移动节点,指的是部署于非地面,且相对于地面移动的节点。A mobile node is a node that moves relative to the ground. Therefore, a ground node is a mobile node, which is a node deployed on the ground and moving relative to the ground (e.g., a node deployed in a moving vehicle); a non-ground node is a mobile node, which is a node deployed off the ground and moving relative to the ground.
参见图11(如图11中的(a)和/或图11中的(b)),为本申请实施例提供的一种示例性的通信架构。Referring to Figure 11 (Figure 11(a) and/or Figure 11(b)), an exemplary communication architecture is provided for an embodiment of this application.
如图11中的(a)所示,IAB节点#1~IAB节点#3均为非地面节点,宿主节点A与宿主节点B也为非地面节点。第一节点可以位于IAB节点#3;若宿主节点为宿主节点A,第二节点可以位于IAB节点#2或宿主节点A;即第一节点可以通过IAB节点#2接入宿主节点A。若宿主节点为宿主节点B,第二节点可以位于IAB节点#1或宿主节点B;即第一节点可以通过IAB节点#1接入宿主节点B。进一步的,宿主节点A与宿主节点B可以与核心网进行通信。此外,IAB节点#1~IAB节点#3中的任一个IAB节点可以为终端设备提供接入服务,和/或,IAB节点#1~IAB节点#3中的任一个IAB节点可以为该IAB节点的后代节点提供回传服务。As shown in Figure 11(a), IAB nodes #1 to #3 are all non-terrestrial nodes, as are host nodes A and B. The first node can be located at IAB node #3; if the host node is host node A, the second node can be located at IAB node #2 or host node A; that is, the first node can access host node A through IAB node #2. If the host node is host node B, the second node can be located at IAB node #1 or host node B; that is, the first node can access host node B through IAB node #1. Furthermore, host nodes A and B can communicate with the core network. In addition, any one of IAB nodes #1 to #3 can provide access services for terminal devices, and/or, any one of IAB nodes #1 to #3 can provide backhaul services for its descendant nodes.
如图11中的(b)所示,IAB节点#1~IAB节点#5均为非地面节点,宿主节点A与宿主节点B均为地面节点。第一节点可以位于IAB节点#3。若宿主节点为宿主节点A,第二节点可以位于IAB节点#2、IAB节点#4、或宿主节点A中的任一项;即第一节点可以通过IAB节点#2与IAB节点#4接入宿主节点A。若宿主节点为宿主节点B,第二节点可以位于IAB节点#1、IAB节点#5、或宿主节点B中的任一项;即第一节点可以通过IAB节点#1与IAB节点#5接入宿主节点B。进一步的,宿主节点A与宿主节点B可以与核心网进行通信。此外,IAB节点#1~IAB节点#5中的任一个IAB节点可以为终端设备提供接入服务,和/或,IAB节点#1~IAB节点#5中的任一个IAB节点可以为该IAB节点的后代节点提供回传服务。As shown in Figure 11(b), IAB nodes #1 to #5 are all non-terrestrial nodes, while host node A and host node B are both terrestrial nodes. The first node can be located at IAB node #3. If the host node is host node A, the second node can be located at any of IAB nodes #2, #4, or host node A; that is, the first node can access host node A through IAB nodes #2 and #4. If the host node is host node B, the second node can be located at any of IAB nodes #1, #5, or host node B; that is, the first node can access host node B through IAB nodes #1 and #5. Furthermore, host node A and host node B can communicate with the core network. In addition, any of IAB nodes #1 to #5 can provide access services for terminal devices, and/or, any of IAB nodes #1 to #5 can provide backhaul services for the descendant nodes of that IAB node.
S1002、第一节点根据第一组配置信息进行通信。其中,多组配置信息包括第一组配置信息。S1002, The first node communicates according to the first set of configuration information. Among them, the first set of configuration information is included in the multiple sets of configuration information.
示例性的,第一组配置信息为多组配置信息中首次触发的配置信息。例如,在触发条件与第一节点接入第二节点之后,第一节点重新接入网络的过程相关的情况下,首次触发指的是,第一节点接入第二节点之后,第一次接入网络的过程中生效的配置信息。For example, the first set of configuration information is the configuration information that is triggered for the first time among multiple sets of configuration information. For instance, if the triggering condition is related to the process of the first node reconnecting to the network after the first node connects to the second node, the first trigger refers to the configuration information that takes effect during the first network access process after the first node connects to the second node.
可选的,第一节点根据第一组配置信息进行通信,包括:第一节点根据第一组配置信息,为其覆盖区域内的终端设备提供服务。Optionally, the first node communicates according to the first set of configuration information, including: the first node provides services to terminal devices within its coverage area according to the first set of configuration information.
可选的,第一节点根据第一组配置信息,进行通信,包括:在第一时刻根据第一组配置信息,进行通信;该通信方法还包括:在第二时刻根据第二组配置信息,进行通信,多组配置信息包括第二组配置信息,第二时刻位于第一时刻之后。Optionally, the first node communicates based on the first set of configuration information, including: communicating based on the first set of configuration information at a first moment; the communication method further includes: communicating based on the second set of configuration information at a second moment, wherein the multiple sets of configuration information include the second set of configuration information, and the second moment is after the first moment.
示例性的,以多组配置信息包括3组配置信息(即配置信息#1~配置信息#3)为例,第一节点接收到第一指示信息之后,可以在不同时间,分别采用不同的配置信息进行通信;例如,第一节点可以在时刻#1根据配置信息#1进行通信,第一节点可以在时刻#2根据配置信息#2进行通信,第一节点可以在时刻#3根据配置信息#3进行通信。其中,时刻#1、时刻#2、时刻#3不同。For example, taking multiple sets of configuration information, including three sets of configuration information (i.e., configuration information #1 to configuration information #3), after receiving the first indication information, the first node can communicate using different configuration information at different times. For instance, the first node can communicate based on configuration information #1 at time #1, based on configuration information #2 at time #2, and based on configuration information #3 at time #3. Here, time #1, time #2, and time #3 are different.
本申请实施例提供的通信方法,IAB-DU(即第一节点)接收其宿主节点配置的触发条件不同的多组配置信息(即宿主节点通过第一指示信息指示的多组配置信息);从而可以根据多组配置信息中的一组配置信息(即第一组配置信息)进行通信。The communication method provided in this application embodiment allows the IAB-DU (i.e., the first node) to receive multiple sets of configuration information with different trigger conditions configured by its host node (i.e., multiple sets of configuration information indicated by the host node through the first indication information); thereby, it can communicate based on one set of configuration information (i.e., the first set of configuration information) among the multiple sets of configuration information.
示例性的,多组配置信息对应的触发条件可以分别与第一节点接入该宿主节点之后,重新接入网络(如重新接入该宿主节点或者新的宿主节点,或切换至其他宿主节点)的时间相关;从而第一节点重新接入网络的过程中,均会触发不同的配置信息;使得第一节点在接入该宿主节点之后,每次重新接入网络的过程中,存在多组配置信息中的一组配置信息生效,使得第一节点可以通过该一组配置信息进行通信。相较于第一节点每次接入网络的过程中,重新获取配置信息的方案,能够降低指示配置信息的信令开销。For example, the triggering conditions corresponding to multiple sets of configuration information can be related to the time when the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the host node (such as reconnecting to the host node or a new host node, or switching to another host node). Therefore, different configuration information will be triggered during each reconnection process of the first node. This ensures that during each reconnection process after connecting to the host node, one set of configuration information from multiple sets becomes effective, allowing the first node to communicate using this set of configuration information. Compared to the scheme where the first node re-acquires configuration information each time it connects to the network, this reduces the signaling overhead of instructing the configuration information.
可选的,多组配置信息中的任意一组配置信息指示以下至少一项信息:标识、触发条件、第一节点的覆盖范围、第一路径的信息、第一节点的地址信息、第一节点的寻呼区域、第一类参考信号配置信息、或第二类参考信号配置信息。Optionally, any one of the multiple sets of configuration information indicates at least one of the following: identifier, triggering condition, coverage area of the first node, information of the first path, address information of the first node, paging area of the first node, configuration information of the first type of reference signal, or configuration information of the second type of reference signal.
其中,触发条件用于触发配置信息,第一路径为第一节点与第一节点重新接入的宿主节点之间的传输路径,第一类参考信号配置信息用于传输第一参考信号,第二类参考信号配置信息用于传输第二参考信号。Among them, the triggering condition is used to trigger the configuration information, the first path is the transmission path between the first node and the host node that the first node reconnects to, the first type of reference signal configuration information is used to transmit the first reference signal, and the second type of reference signal configuration information is used to transmit the second reference signal.
示例性的,配置信息指示的标识用于识别不同的配置信息。For example, the identifiers indicated by the configuration information are used to identify different configuration information.
可选的,配置信息指示该触发条件的情况下,第一节点可以在满足该触发条件的情况下,根据该配置信息进行通信。例如,第一组配置信息指示的触发条件为第一条件,此时,根据第一组配置信息进行通信,包括:在满足第一条件的情况下,根据第一组配置信息进行通信。第一组配置信息指示的触发条件也可以称为第一组配置信息对应的触发条件,因此,在满足第一条件的情况下,根据第一组配置信息进行通信,也可以替换为:在满足第一组配置信息对应的触发条件的情况下,根据第一组配置信息进行通信。Optionally, if the configuration information indicates the triggering condition, the first node can communicate according to the configuration information when the triggering condition is met. For example, if the triggering condition indicated by the first set of configuration information is a first condition, then communicating according to the first set of configuration information includes: communicating according to the first set of configuration information when the first condition is met. The triggering condition indicated by the first set of configuration information can also be called the triggering condition corresponding to the first set of configuration information. Therefore, communicating according to the first set of configuration information when the first condition is met can also be replaced by: communicating according to the first set of configuration information when the triggering condition corresponding to the first set of configuration information is met.
可选的,触发条件可以包括如下三种可能的实现方式:Optionally, the triggering condition can include the following three possible implementation methods:
一种可能的实现方式中,触发条件为基于时间的触发条件。即多组配置信息可以基于不同时间触发。In one possible implementation, the triggering condition is time-based. That is, multiple sets of configuration information can be triggered based on different times.
示例性的,第一节点的本地时钟处于不同的时段时,触发不同的配置信息(即第一节点的本地时钟所处的时段对应的配置信息生效)。例如,以多组配置信息包括3组配置信息(即第一组配置信息~第三组配置信息)为例,第一组配置信息指示的触发条件可以为第一节点的本地时钟位于第一时段内;类似的,第二组配置信息指示的触发条件可以为第一节点的本地时钟位于第二时段内;第三组配置信息指示的触发条件可以为第一节点的本地时钟位于第三时段内。其中,第一时段、第二时段、以及第三时段互不相同。For example, different configuration information is triggered when the local clock of the first node is in different time periods (i.e., the configuration information corresponding to the time period in which the local clock of the first node is located takes effect). For instance, taking multiple sets of configuration information, including three sets of configuration information (i.e., the first set of configuration information to the third set of configuration information), the triggering condition indicated by the first set of configuration information can be that the local clock of the first node is in the first time period; similarly, the triggering condition indicated by the second set of configuration information can be that the local clock of the first node is in the second time period; and the triggering condition indicated by the third set of configuration information can be that the local clock of the first node is in the third time period. Among these, the first time period, the second time period, and the third time period are all different.
可选的,配置信息对应的时段(即用于触发该配置信息的时段,如第一组配置信息对应的第一时段)可以与第一节点接入第二节点之后,重新接入网络的时间有关。Optionally, the time period corresponding to the configuration information (i.e. the time period used to trigger the configuration information, such as the first time period corresponding to the first set of configuration information) may be related to the time when the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the second node.
应理解,第一节点在移动过程中会切换不同的宿主节点;通常切换过程也可以认为是接入网络的过程。从而第一节点接入第二节点之后,在移动过程中切换不同的新宿主节点,也可以认为是第一节点重新接入网络。It should be understood that the first node will switch to different host nodes during its movement; this switching process can usually be considered as the process of accessing the network. Therefore, after the first node accesses the second node, switching to different new host nodes during its movement can also be considered as the first node re-accessing the network.
因此,宿主节点或核心网可以根据第一节点和IAB网络中各节点的移动速度与移动方向,确定第一节点重新接入网络的时间;例如,在第一节点接入第二节点之后,多次重新接入网络。从而,宿主节点或核心网可以确定第一节点多次重新接入网络的时间,进一步的,基于第一节点多次重新接入网络的时间,分别确定不同的时段。例如,每个时段包括第一节点多次重新接入网络中的一次重新接入网络的时间。使得不同的时段可以分别作为多组配置信息中不同组的配置信息的触发条件。Therefore, the host node or core network can determine the time for the first node to reconnect to the network based on the movement speed and direction of movement of the first node and each node in the IAB network; for example, after the first node reconnects to the second node, it may reconnect to the network multiple times. Thus, the host node or core network can determine the times for the first node to reconnect to the network multiple times, and further, based on these times, determine different time periods. For example, each time period includes the time of one of the multiple reconnections by the first node. This allows different time periods to serve as trigger conditions for different sets of configuration information within multiple sets of configuration information.
具体的,第一节点的移动方向和移动速度可以是第一节点通过其所属的IAB节点的MT告知宿主节点的。例如,在该MT接入的过程中,携带在MT请求接入的信息中;如第一节点的移动方向和移动速度可以承载于随机接入流程中的消息1(message 1,Msg 1)或MsgA中。Specifically, the direction and speed of movement of the first node can be communicated to the host node by the first node through the MT of its affiliated IAB node. For example, during the MT access process, it can be carried in the MT's access request information; such as the direction and speed of movement of the first node can be carried in message 1 (Msg 1) or MsgA in the random access procedure.
示例性的,以多组配置信息包括3组配置信息(即第一组配置信息~第三组配置信息),第一组配置信息的触发条件与第一时段相关,第二组配置信息的触发条件与第二时段相关,第三组配置信息的触发条件与第三时段相关,且第一节点分别在时刻#1、时刻#2、时刻#3切换新宿主节点为例,宿主节点或核心网可以基于时刻#1确定第一时段(如第一时段包括时刻#1),类似的,可以基于时刻#2确定第二时段、基于时刻#3确定第三时段,使得在第一节点的本地时钟位于第一时段内时,第一组配置信息生效;在第一节点的本地时钟位于第二时段内时,第二组配置信息生效;在第一节点的本地时钟位于第三时段内时,第三组配置信息生效。For example, consider multiple sets of configuration information, including three sets of configuration information (i.e., the first set of configuration information to the third set of configuration information). The triggering condition of the first set of configuration information is related to the first time period, the triggering condition of the second set of configuration information is related to the second time period, and the triggering condition of the third set of configuration information is related to the third time period. Assuming the first node switches to a new host node at time #1, time #2, and time #3 respectively, the host node or core network can determine the first time period based on time #1 (e.g., the first time period includes time #1). Similarly, it can determine the second time period based on time #2 and the third time period based on time #3. This ensures that the first set of configuration information takes effect when the local clock of the first node is within the first time period; the second set of configuration information takes effect when the local clock of the first node is within the second time period; and the third set of configuration information takes effect when the local clock of the first node is within the third time period.
基于该可能的实现方式,多组配置信息可以基于不同的时段触发,即多组配置信息分别在不同的时段内生效;因此第一节点可以根据其本地时钟,采用不用的配置信息进行通信;示例性的,配置信息的生效时段可以与第一节点接入第二节点之后,重新接入网络的时间有关。例如,配置信息的生效时段可以包括第一节点重新接入网络的时间;使得配置信息可以在第一节点重新接入网络的过程中生效。相较于第一节点每次接入网络的过程中,重新获取配置信息的方案,能够降低指示配置信息的信令开销。Based on this possible implementation, multiple sets of configuration information can be triggered based on different time periods, meaning that multiple sets of configuration information take effect during different time periods. Therefore, the first node can use different configuration information for communication based on its local clock. For example, the effective period of the configuration information can be related to the time when the first node reconnects to the network after connecting to the second node. For instance, the effective period of the configuration information can include the time when the first node reconnects to the network, allowing the configuration information to take effect during the process of the first node reconnecting to the network. Compared to the scheme where the first node reacquires the configuration information every time it reconnects to the network, this reduces the signaling overhead of instructing the configuration information.
另一种可能的实现方式中,触发条件为基于位置的触发条件。即多组配置信息可以基于不同的参考位置与阈值位置触发。In another possible implementation, the triggering condition is location-based. That is, multiple sets of configuration information can be triggered based on different reference positions and threshold positions.
示例性的,多组配置信息中的每一组配置信息分别对应一个参考位置和一个阈值。从而,第一节点的位置与某一个配置信息对应的参考位置之间的距离小于或等于该配置信息对应的阈值,和/或,第一节点的位置与某一个配置信息对应的参考位置之间的角度小于或等于该配置信息对应的阈值时,触发该配置信息(即该配置信息生效)。For example, each set of configuration information in the multiple sets of configuration information corresponds to a reference position and a threshold. Therefore, when the distance between the position of the first node and the reference position corresponding to a certain configuration information is less than or equal to the threshold corresponding to that configuration information, and/or when the angle between the position of the first node and the reference position corresponding to a certain configuration information is less than or equal to the threshold corresponding to that configuration information, the configuration information is triggered (i.e., the configuration information takes effect).
例如,第一组配置信息的触发条件和第一节点与参考位置之间的距离有关时,第一组配置信息的触发条件可以通过参考位置与第一阈值表示;第一组配置信息的触发条件和第一节点与参考位置之间的角度有关时,第一组配置信息的触发条件可以通过参考位置与第二阈值表示。For example, when the triggering condition of the first set of configuration information is related to the distance between the first node and the reference position, the triggering condition of the first set of configuration information can be represented by the reference position and the first threshold; when the triggering condition of the first set of configuration information is related to the angle between the first node and the reference position, the triggering condition of the first set of configuration information can be represented by the reference position and the second threshold.
示例性的,多组配置信息分别对应的阈值可以是相同或不同的。具体的,阈值可以是预先配置的,或者,也可以是默认值;此时配置信息可以指示参考位置;阈值也可以是配置信息指示的,此时配置信息可以指示参考位置和阈值。使得第一节点通过参考位置和阈值确定该配置信息的触发条件。For example, the thresholds corresponding to multiple sets of configuration information can be the same or different. Specifically, the threshold can be pre-configured, or it can be a default value; in this case, the configuration information can indicate a reference position. Alternatively, the threshold can be indicated by the configuration information, in which case the configuration information can indicate both the reference position and the threshold. This allows the first node to determine the triggering condition of the configuration information based on the reference position and the threshold.
可选的,配置信息对应的参考位置与阈值,可以与第一节点重新接入网络的过程中所处的位置有关。Optionally, the reference position and threshold corresponding to the configuration information can be related to the position of the first node during the process of reconnecting to the network.
示例性的,宿主节点或核心网可以根据第一节点和IAB网络中各节点的移动速度与移动方向,确定第一节点重新接入网络时所处的位置;例如,在第一节点接入第二节点之后,多次重新接入网络。从而,宿主节点或核心网可以确定第一节点多次重新接入网络时所处的位置,进一步的,基于第一节点多次重新接入网络时所处的位置,分别确定不同的参考位置。例如,每个参考位置与第一节点多次重新接入网络中的一次重新接入网络时所处的位置之间的距离或角度小于或等于阈值。使得不同的参考位置可以分别用于确定多组配置信息中不同组配置信息的触发条件。For example, the host node or core network can determine the location of the first node when it reconnects to the network based on the movement speed and direction of movement of the first node and each node in the IAB network; for example, after the first node reconnects to the second node, it reconnects to the network multiple times. Thus, the host node or core network can determine the location of the first node when it reconnects to the network multiple times, and further, based on the location of the first node when it reconnects to the network multiple times, determine different reference locations. For example, the distance or angle between each reference location and the location of the first node during one of its multiple reconnections to the network is less than or equal to a threshold. This allows different reference locations to be used to determine the triggering conditions for different sets of configuration information in multiple sets of configuration information.
具体的,第一节点重新接入网络的实现,以及宿主节点或核心网获取第一节点的移动方向和移动速度的实现,可以参照上述一种可能的实现中的相关描述在,在此不再赘述。Specifically, the implementation of the first node reconnecting to the network, and the implementation of the host node or core network obtaining the first node's direction of movement and speed of movement, can be referred to the relevant description in one of the possible implementations above, and will not be repeated here.
示例性的,以多组配置信息包括3组配置信息(即第一组配置信息~第三组配置信息),第一组配置信息的触发条件可以基于参考位置#1与阈值#1(如第一阈值或第二阈值)确定,第二组配置信息的触发条件可以基于参考位置#2与阈值#2确定,第三组配置信息的触发条件可以基于参考位置#3与阈值#3确定,且第一节点分别在位置#1、位置#2、位置#3切换新宿主节点为例,宿主节点或核心网可以基于位置#1确定参考位置#1,类似的,可以基于位置#2确定参考位置#2、基于位置#3确定参考位置#3,使得在第一节点位于位置#1时第一组配置信息生效;在第一节点位于位置#2时第二组配置信息生效;在第一节点位于位置#3时第三组配置信息生效。For example, consider multiple sets of configuration information, including three sets of configuration information (i.e., the first set of configuration information to the third set of configuration information). The triggering condition for the first set of configuration information can be determined based on reference position #1 and threshold #1 (such as the first threshold or the second threshold). The triggering condition for the second set of configuration information can be determined based on reference position #2 and threshold #2. The triggering condition for the third set of configuration information can be determined based on reference position #3 and threshold #3. Taking the example of the first node switching to a new host node at position #1, position #2, and position #3 respectively, the host node or core network can determine the reference position #1 based on position #1. Similarly, the reference position #2 can be determined based on position #2, and the reference position #3 can be determined based on position #3, so that the first set of configuration information takes effect when the first node is at position #1; the second set of configuration information takes effect when the first node is at position #2; and the third set of configuration information takes effect when the first node is at position #3.
基于该可能的实现方式,多组配置信息可以基于不同的位置触发,即多组配置信息分别在第一节点处于不同位置时生效;因此第一节点可以根据其随处位置,采用不用的配置信息进行通信;示例性的,配置信息的触发条件可以与第一节点接入第二节点之后,重新接入网络时所处的位置有关。例如,用于配置信息的触发条件的参考位置与第一节点重新接入网络时所处的位置之间的距离或角度小于或等于阈值;使得配置信息可以在第一节点重新接入网络的过程中生效。相较于第一节点每次接入网络的过程中,重新获取配置信息的方案,能够降低指示配置信息的信令开销。Based on this possible implementation, multiple sets of configuration information can be triggered based on different locations, meaning that multiple sets of configuration information take effect when the first node is in different locations. Therefore, the first node can use different configuration information for communication depending on its location. For example, the triggering condition for the configuration information can be related to the location of the first node when it reconnects to the network after connecting to the second node. For instance, the distance or angle between the reference location used for the triggering condition of the configuration information and the location of the first node when it reconnects to the network is less than or equal to a threshold, allowing the configuration information to take effect during the process of the first node reconnecting to the network. Compared to the scheme of re-acquiring configuration information every time the first node reconnects to the network, this reduces the signaling overhead of instructing the configuration information.
又一种可能的实现方式中,触发条件为基于信息的触发条件。即多组配置信息可以基于不同信息触发。In another possible implementation, the triggering condition is an information-based triggering condition. That is, multiple sets of configuration information can be triggered based on different information.
示例性的,第一节点接收到第一指示信息之后,在第一节点接收到不同用于触发配置信息的信息时,触发不同的配置信息(即第一节点接收到的信息(即用于触发配置信息的信息)对应的配置信息生效)。For example, after the first node receives the first indication information, when the first node receives different information used to trigger the configuration information, it triggers different configuration information (that is, the configuration information corresponding to the information received by the first node (i.e. the information used to trigger the configuration information) takes effect).
示例性的,不同信息可以理解为:格式不同的信息;或者,也可以理解为来自不同宿主节点的信息;或者,也可以理解为内容不同的信息;本申请实施例不予限制。For example, different information can be understood as: information with different formats; or, information from different host nodes; or, information with different content; the embodiments of this application are not limited thereto.
示例性的,以多组配置信息包括3组配置信息(即第一组配置信息~第三组配置信息)为例,第一组配置信息可以与信息#1相关;第二组配置信息可以与信息#2相关;第三组配置信息可以与信息#3相关。其中,信息#1、信息2、信息3互不相同。For example, taking multiple sets of configuration information, including three sets of configuration information (i.e., the first set of configuration information to the third set of configuration information), the first set of configuration information can be related to information #1; the second set of configuration information can be related to information #2; and the third set of configuration information can be related to information #3. Among them, information #1, information 2, and information 3 are all different from each other.
基于前述可知,第一节点在接入网络的过程中(即IAB-DU建立的过程中),会释放原先的配置信息,并获取新的配置信息;因此,第一节点在接入的第二节点之后,若接收到用于触发配置信息的信息,表示第一节点重新接入网络。应理解,第一节点在移动过程中会切换不同的宿主节点;通常切换过程也可以认为是接入网络的过程。因此,第一节点接入第二节点之后,在移动过程中切换不同的新宿主节点可以认为是第一节点在移动过程中重新接入网络。或者,第一节点从RRC连接态(RRC-idle)转为RRC空闲态(RRC-connected)/非激活态(RRC-inactive),进一步的,在第一节点从RRC空闲态/非激活态重新转为RRC连接态的过程中,需接入宿主节点;因此,第一节点从RRC空闲态/非激活态重新转为RRC连接态的过程也可以认为是第一节点重新接入网络的过程。As mentioned above, during the network access process (i.e., during the establishment of the IAB-DU), the first node releases its original configuration information and acquires new configuration information. Therefore, if the first node receives information to trigger configuration information after accessing the second node, it indicates that the first node has re-accessed the network. It should be understood that the first node switches between different host nodes during its movement; this switching process can usually be considered as a network access process. Therefore, after accessing the second node, switching between different new host nodes during movement can be considered as the first node re-accessing the network during its movement. Alternatively, the first node transitions from RRC-idle to RRC-connected/inactive states. Furthermore, during the transition from RRC-idle/inactive to RRC-connected states, it needs to access a host node; therefore, the transition from RRC-idle/inactive to RRC-connected states can also be considered as the first node re-accessing the network.
示例性的,以多组配置信息包括3组配置信息(即第一组配置信息~第三组配置信息)为例,第一组配置信息与信息#1相关;第二组配置信息与信息#2相关;第三组配置信息与信息#3相关为例,因此第一节点接入第二节点之后,若接收到信息#1表示第一组配置信息生效;若接收到信息#2表示第二组配置信息生效;若接收到信息#3表示第三组配置信息生效。For example, taking multiple sets of configuration information including three sets of configuration information (i.e., the first set of configuration information to the third set of configuration information) as an example, the first set of configuration information is related to information #1; the second set of configuration information is related to information #2; and the third set of configuration information is related to information #3. Therefore, after the first node connects to the second node, if information #1 is received, it means that the first set of configuration information is effective; if information #2 is received, it means that the second set of configuration information is effective; and if information #3 is received, it means that the third set of configuration information is effective.
基于该可能的实现方式,多组配置信息可以基于不同的信息触发,即多组配置信息分别在第一节点接收到不同用于触发配置信息的信息时生效;因此第一节点可以根据接收到的不同用于触发配置信息的信息其,采用不用的配置信息进行通信。可以理解的是,会释放原先的配置信息,并获取新的配置信息;因此,第一节点在接入的第二节点之后,若接收到用于触发配置信息的信息,表示第一节点重新接入网络。也就是说,在接入的第二节点之后,第一节点重新接入网络的过程中回获取到不同用于触发配置信息的信息。使得配置信息可以在第一节点重新接入网络的过程中生效。例如,用于触发配置信息的信息可以通过1比特表示,相较于第一节点每次接入网络的过程中,重新为第一节点发送配置信息的方案,能够降低指示配置信息的信令的资源开销。Based on this possible implementation, multiple sets of configuration information can be triggered by different information. That is, each set of configuration information takes effect when the first node receives different information used to trigger the configuration. Therefore, the first node can use different configuration information for communication based on the different information received to trigger the configuration. It is understood that the original configuration information will be released and new configuration information will be acquired. Therefore, if the first node receives information used to trigger the configuration after connecting to the second node, it indicates that the first node has reconnected to the network. In other words, during the process of reconnecting to the network after connecting to the second node, the first node will acquire different information used to trigger the configuration. This allows the configuration information to take effect during the process of the first node reconnecting to the network. For example, the information used to trigger the configuration can be represented by 1 bit. Compared to the scheme where the first node resends the configuration information every time it reconnects to the network, this reduces the resource overhead of signaling indicating the configuration information.
可选的,第一节点的覆盖范围可以包括如下两种可能的实现方式:Optionally, the coverage area of the first node can include the following two possible implementations:
第一种可能的实现方式,配置信息可以指示至少一个小区,此时第一节点的覆盖范围包括该至少一个小区的覆盖范围,第一节点管理的小区包括该至少一个小区。In the first possible implementation, the configuration information can indicate at least one cell, where the coverage of the first node includes the coverage of the at least one cell, and the cells managed by the first node include the at least one cell.
应理解,IAB节点可以管理一个或多个小区,从而IAB节点的覆盖区域可以包括该一个或多个小区的覆盖区域。因此,通常利用IAB节点管理的小区指示该IAB节点的覆盖区域。It should be understood that an IAB node can manage one or more cells, and thus the coverage area of an IAB node can include the coverage areas of those one or more cells. Therefore, the cells managed by an IAB node are typically used to indicate the coverage area of that IAB node.
示例性的,配置信息指示至少一个小区,可以包括:配置信息指示至少一个小区的标识。具体的,小区的标识可以为物理小区标识(physical cell identifier,PCI)。For example, the configuration information indicating at least one cell may include: an identifier indicating at least one cell. Specifically, the cell identifier may be a physical cell identifier (PCI).
示例性的,配置信息可以通过小区列表(如PCI列表)指示至少一个小区。从而多组配置信息分别对应不同的小区列表。For example, configuration information can indicate at least one cell through a cell list (such as a PCI list). Thus, multiple sets of configuration information can correspond to different cell lists.
第二种可能的实现方式,配置信息可以指示一个或多个子区域。此时,第一节点的覆盖范围包括该一个或多个子区域。In a second possible implementation, the configuration information can indicate one or more sub-regions. In this case, the coverage area of the first node includes these one or more sub-regions.
示例性的,一个或多个子区域可以称为一组子区域;因此,多组配置信息分别对应不同组的子区域。为了方便描述,下面以多组配置信息中的任一组配置信息指示的一个或多个子区域为例进行介绍,在此统一说明,不再赘述。For example, one or more sub-regions can be referred to as a group of sub-regions; therefore, multiple sets of configuration information correspond to different groups of sub-regions. For ease of description, the following will use one or more sub-regions indicated by any one of the multiple sets of configuration information as an example, and will not be elaborated further here.
可选的,配置信息指示一个或多个子区域,包括:配置信息指示一个或多个子区域分别对应的参考位置和阈值;其中,第一子区域是根据第一子区域对应的参考位置和阈值确定的,第一子区域是一个或多个子区域中的任一个子区域。Optionally, the configuration information indicates one or more sub-regions, including: the configuration information indicates the reference position and threshold corresponding to one or more sub-regions respectively; wherein, the first sub-region is determined according to the reference position and threshold corresponding to the first sub-region, and the first sub-region is any one of the one or more sub-regions.
示例性的,一个或多个子区域分别对应的参考位置和阈值,可以理解为:一个或多个子区域分别对应的参考位置,以及一个或多个子区域分别对应的阈值;也就是说,一个或多个子区域中,每个子区域分别对应一个参考位置,且每个子区域分别对应一个阈值。For example, the reference position and threshold corresponding to one or more sub-regions can be understood as: the reference position corresponding to one or more sub-regions, and the threshold corresponding to one or more sub-regions; that is, in one or more sub-regions, each sub-region corresponds to a reference position, and each sub-region corresponds to a threshold.
可选的,不同子区域分别对应的参考位置可以相同或不同;类似的,不同子区域分别对应的阈值可以相同或不同。Optionally, the reference positions corresponding to different sub-regions can be the same or different; similarly, the thresholds corresponding to different sub-regions can be the same or different.
示例性的,子区域对应的参考位置和阈值可以通过表格实现;例如,可以通过如表1实现:For example, the reference position and threshold corresponding to the sub-region can be implemented using a table; for instance, it can be implemented as shown in Table 1:
表1
Table 1
或者,子区域分别对应的参考位置和阈值可以通过集合实现,该集合可以包括如下内容:{子区域#0;参考位置#0;阈值#0},{子区域#1;参考位置#1;阈值#1},{子区域#2;参考位置#2;阈值#2},{子区域#3;参考位置#3;阈值#3},{…}。其中,集合中的第一列表示每个子区域,第二列表示每个子区域分别对应的参考位置,第三列表示每个子区域分别对应的阈值。Alternatively, the reference positions and thresholds corresponding to each sub-region can be implemented using sets, which may include the following: {sub-region #0; reference position #0; threshold #0}, {sub-region #1; reference position #1; threshold #1}, {sub-region #2; reference position #2; threshold #2}, {sub-region #3; reference position #3; threshold #3}, {…}. Here, the first column of the set represents each sub-region, the second column represents the reference position corresponding to each sub-region, and the third column represents the threshold corresponding to each sub-region.
因此,基于上述表1或上述集合可知,子区域#0对应的参考位置为参考位置#0,子区域#0对应的阈值为阈值#0;类似的,子区域#1对应的参考位置为参考位置#1,子区域#1对应的阈值为阈值#1;…;子区域#3对应的参考位置为参考位置#3,子区域#3对应的阈值为阈值#3。Therefore, based on Table 1 or the set above, it can be seen that the reference position corresponding to sub-region #0 is reference position #0, and the threshold corresponding to sub-region #0 is threshold #0; similarly, the reference position corresponding to sub-region #1 is reference position #1, and the threshold corresponding to sub-region #1 is threshold #1; ...; the reference position corresponding to sub-region #3 is reference position #3, and the threshold corresponding to sub-region #3 is threshold #3.
为了方便描述,下面以子区域分别对应的参考位置和阈值通过表格实现为例进行介绍,在此统一说明,不再赘述。For ease of description, the following example uses a table to illustrate the reference positions and thresholds corresponding to each sub-region. This will be explained uniformly here and will not be repeated.
可选的,配置信息可以指示一个或多个子区域分别对应的标识(如每个子区域的索引),此时,第一节点可以结合一个或多个子区域分别对应的标识,以及一个或多个子区域与其分别对应的参考位置和阈值之间的对应关系(如上述表1)确定每个子区域分别对应的参考位置和阈值。例如,配置信息可以指示子区域#0~子区域#2;此时,子区域#0对应的参考位置为参考位置#0,子区域#0对应的阈值为阈值#0;子区域#1对应的参考位置为参考位置#1,子区域#1对应的阈值为阈值#1;子区域#2对应的参考位置为参考位置#2,子区域#2对应的阈值为阈值#2。Optionally, the configuration information can indicate the identifiers (such as the index of each sub-region) corresponding to one or more sub-regions. In this case, the first node can combine the identifiers corresponding to one or more sub-regions, as well as the correspondence between one or more sub-regions and their respective reference positions and thresholds (as shown in Table 1 above), to determine the reference position and threshold corresponding to each sub-region. For example, the configuration information can indicate sub-regions #0 to #2; in this case, the reference position corresponding to sub-region #0 is reference position #0, and the threshold corresponding to sub-region #0 is threshold #0; the reference position corresponding to sub-region #1 is reference position #1, and the threshold corresponding to sub-region #1 is threshold #1; the reference position corresponding to sub-region #2 is reference position #2, and the threshold corresponding to sub-region #2 is threshold #2.
可选的,第一子区域对应的参考位置与第一子区域的边界上的任一位置之间的距离小于或等于第一子区域对应的阈值。Optionally, the distance between the reference position corresponding to the first sub-region and any position on the boundary of the first sub-region is less than or equal to the threshold corresponding to the first sub-region.
示例性的,第一节点可以将第一子区域对应的第一参考位置作为圆心画圆的到圆形区域;该圆形区域即为第一子区域。其中,圆形区域的半径可以小于或等于第一子区域对应的阈值,也就是说,圆形区域(即第一子区域)的边界上任一位置与圆心(即第一子区域对应的参考位置)之间的距离小于或等于第一子区域对应的阈值。For example, the first node can draw a circular region by using the first reference position corresponding to the first sub-region as the center; this circular region is the first sub-region. The radius of the circular region can be less than or equal to the threshold corresponding to the first sub-region. That is, the distance between any position on the boundary of the circular region (i.e., the first sub-region) and the center of the circle (i.e., the reference position corresponding to the first sub-region) is less than or equal to the threshold corresponding to the first sub-region.
可选的,第一路径为与第二节点之间的传输路径。因此,多组配置信息分别对应不同的第一路径的信息。Optionally, the first path is the transmission path between the first and second nodes. Therefore, multiple sets of configuration information correspond to different information for the first path.
示例性的,配置信息可以指示第一路径的标识,或者,配置信息可以指示第一路径上的承载信息,或者,配置信息可以指示第一路径的路由信息。For example, the configuration information may indicate the identifier of the first path, or the configuration information may indicate the bearer information on the first path, or the configuration information may indicate the routing information of the first path.
示例性的,如图11所示,在第一节点位于IAB节点#3,第一节点重新接入的宿主节点包括宿主节点A的情况下,以上行传输为例,在图11中的(a)中,第一路径指的是:IAB节点#3→IAB节点#2→宿主节点A;在图11中的(b)中,第一路径指的是:IAB节点#3→IAB节点#2→IAB节点#4→宿主节点A。For example, as shown in Figure 11, when the first node is located at IAB node #3 and the host node that the first node reconnects to includes host node A, taking the uplink transmission as an example, in Figure 11(a), the first path refers to: IAB node #3 → IAB node #2 → host node A; in Figure 11(b), the first path refers to: IAB node #3 → IAB node #2 → IAB node #4 → host node A.
第一节点重新接入的宿主节点包括宿主节点B的情况下,以上行传输为例,在图11中的(a)中,第一路径指的是:IAB节点#3→IAB节点#1→宿主节点B;在图11中的(b)中,第一路径指的是:IAB节点#3→IAB节点#1→IAB节点#5→宿主节点B。When the host node that the first node reconnects to includes host node B, taking the uplink transmission as an example, in Figure 11(a), the first path refers to: IAB node #3 → IAB node #1 → host node B; in Figure 11(b), the first path refers to: IAB node #3 → IAB node #1 → IAB node #5 → host node B.
可选的,多组配置信息分别对应不同的地址信息。从而,不同配置信息生效时,第一节点的地址信息不同。Optionally, multiple sets of configuration information can correspond to different address information. Therefore, when different configuration information takes effect, the address information of the first node will be different.
示例性的,地址信息可以为网络协议(internet protocol,IP)地址或BAP地址。即多组配置信息分别对应不同的IP地址,或者,多组配置信息分别对应不同的BAP地址。For example, the address information can be an Internet Protocol (IP) address or a BAP address. That is, multiple sets of configuration information can correspond to different IP addresses, or multiple sets of configuration information can correspond to different BAP addresses.
可选的,配置信息可以通过指示至少一个跟踪区域码(tracking area code,TAC),和/或,至少一个无线接入网区域码(radio access network area code,RAC(或RANAC)),指示第一节点的寻呼区域。也就是说,配置信息指示第一节点的寻呼区域,包括:配置信息指示至少一个TAC,和/或,配置信息指示至少一个RAC。Optionally, the configuration information may indicate the paging area of the first node by indicating at least one tracking area code (TAC) and/or at least one radio access network area code (RAC (or RANAC)). That is, the configuration information indicating the paging area of the first node includes: the configuration information indicating at least one TAC, and/or the configuration information indicating at least one RAC.
其中,第一节点的寻呼区域包括至少一个TAC对应的至少一个跟踪区域(tracking area,TA),和/或,第一节点的寻呼区域包括至少一个TAC对应的至少一个无线接入网区域(radio access network area,RA)。The paging area of the first node includes at least one tracking area (TA) corresponding to at least one TAC, and/or the paging area of the first node includes at least one radio access network area (RA) corresponding to at least one TAC.
应理解,一个TA由一个或多个RA组成;因此,TAC对应的至少一个RA可以理解为:TAC对应的TA由该至少一个RA组成。也就是说,根据RA可以确定唯一的TA或TAC。It should be understood that a TA consists of one or more RAs; therefore, at least one RA corresponding to a TAC can be understood as: the TA corresponding to a TAC consists of that at least one RA. In other words, a unique TA or TAC can be determined based on the RA.
示例性的,至少一个TAC可以成为一组TAC,或者,也可以称为一个TAC集合。类似的,至少一个RAC可以成为一组RAC,或者,也可以称为一个RAC集合。因此,多组配置信息可以对应不同的TAC集合,和/或,多组配置信息可以对应不同的RAC集合。For example, at least one TAC can be a set of TACs, or a collection of TACs. Similarly, at least one RAC can be a set of RACs, or a collection of RACs. Therefore, multiple sets of configuration information can correspond to different sets of TACs, and/or multiple sets of configuration information can correspond to different sets of RACs.
基于前述对配置信息的介绍可知,在配置信息指示标识、触发条件、第一节点的覆盖区域、第一路径的信息、第一节点的地址信息、以及第一节点的寻呼区域的情况下,若第一节点的覆盖区域通过小区列表表示,第一节点的地址信息通过IP地址或BAP地址表示,第一节点的寻呼信息通过TAC集合和/或RAC集合表示,多组配置信息可以包括如表2所示的内容:Based on the foregoing description of configuration information, it can be seen that, in the case of configuration information indicator, triggering condition, coverage area of the first node, information of the first path, address information of the first node, and paging area of the first node, if the coverage area of the first node is represented by a cell list, the address information of the first node is represented by an IP address or BAP address, and the paging information of the first node is represented by a TAC set and/or a RAC set, multiple sets of configuration information may include the contents shown in Table 2:
表2
Table 2
其中,表2中的各项参数的实现,可以参见上述实施例的相关描述,在此不再赘述。The implementation of each parameter in Table 2 can be found in the relevant descriptions of the above embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是,表2为第一指示信息指示的多组配置信息的一种示例性的实现;实际上,多组配置信息也可以包括上述表2中任意一项或多项参数,即多组配置信息可以包括上述表2中的任意一列或多列信息,本申请实施例不予限制。示例性的,多组配置信息也可以视为配置信息集合,或者,也可以视为配置池(configuration pool)。因此,第一指示信息指示多组配置信息,可以理解为:第一指示信息指示配置信息集合或配置池。It should be noted that Table 2 is an exemplary implementation of multiple sets of configuration information indicated by the first indication information; in fact, multiple sets of configuration information may also include any one or more parameters in Table 2 above, that is, multiple sets of configuration information may include any one or more columns of information in Table 2 above, and this application embodiment does not limit this. For example, multiple sets of configuration information can also be regarded as a set of configuration information, or it can also be regarded as a configuration pool. Therefore, the first indication information indicating multiple sets of configuration information can be understood as: the first indication information indicates a set of configuration information or a configuration pool.
可选的,第一指示信息还可以指示配置信息集合或配置池的有效期。从而,在第一节点的本地时钟位于有效期内时,第一节点可以根据多组配置信息中的一组配置信息(如第一组配置信息)进行通信。Optionally, the first indication information may also indicate the validity period of the configuration information set or configuration pool. Thus, when the local clock of the first node is within the validity period, the first node can communicate based on one set of configuration information (such as the first set of configuration information) from multiple sets of configuration information.
可选的,第一参考信号用于终端设备接入网络;第二参考信号用于IAB节点、IAB-MT、或IAB-DU(如第一节点)中的任一项接入网络。Optionally, the first reference signal is used for the terminal device to access the network; the second reference signal is used for any one of the IAB node, IAB-MT, or IAB-DU (such as the first node) to access the network.
例如,第一参考信号可以用于终端设备接入IAB节点时的波束扫描;相应的,第二参考信号用于IAB节点、IAB-MT、或IAB-DU(如第一节点)中的任一项接入宿主节点时的波束扫描。For example, the first reference signal can be used for beam scanning when a terminal device accesses an IAB node; correspondingly, the second reference signal is used for beam scanning when any of the IAB node, IAB-MT, or IAB-DU (such as the first node) accesses a host node.
示例性的,第一参考信号和第二参考信号的实现可以包括但不限于以下几种:For example, the implementation of the first reference signal and the second reference signal may include, but is not limited to, the following:
实现方式一:第一参考信号和第二参考信号为不同类型的参考信号。例如,第一参考信号为同步信号/物理层广播信道块(synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block,SSB(或SS/PBCH block))同步信号,第二参考信号为切换专用SSB信号(称为HO(handover)SSB)。Implementation Method 1: The first reference signal and the second reference signal are reference signals of different types. For example, the first reference signal is the synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (SSB (or SS/PBCH block)) synchronization signal, and the second reference signal is the handover dedicated SSB signal (called HO (handover) SSB).
第一参考信号为周期信号,且第一参考信号的周期为第一周期。例如,第一周期的典型周期为5毫秒(ms)、10ms、20ms、40ms、80ms、160ms等毫秒级的周期。The first reference signal is a periodic signal, and the period of the first reference signal is the first period. For example, the typical period of the first period is in the millisecond range, such as 5 milliseconds (ms), 10 ms, 20 ms, 40 ms, 80 ms, 160 ms, etc.
第二参考信号为非周期信号或周期信号,当第二参考信号为周期信号时,第二参考信号的周期为第二周期。例如,第二周期的典型周期为1秒(s)、2s、4s、8s、16s、32s、64s、128s、256s、512s、1024s等秒级的周期,第二周期大于第一周期。The second reference signal can be an aperiodic signal or a periodic signal. When the second reference signal is a periodic signal, its period is the second period. For example, typical periods of the second period are in the range of 1 second (s), 2s, 4s, 8s, 16s, 32s, 64s, 128s, 256s, 512s, 1024s, etc. The second period is longer than the first period.
可选的,第一参考信号和第二参考信号的时域位置、频域位置或极化方式中至少一项不同。例如,第一参考信号和第二参考信号的时域位置(如占用的帧、子帧、时隙、符号等位置)不同,如第一参考信号和第二参考信号可以时分复用。又例如,第一参考信号和第二参考信号的频域位置不同,如第一参考信号和第二参考信号可以频分复用,第二参考信号可以不必处于预先规定的同步栅格(synchronization raster)频点位置上。再例如,第一参考信号和第二参考信号采用不同的极化方式(如线极化、左旋圆极化、右旋圆极化、椭圆极化等)。上述三个举例可以任意两两组合或三个同时满足,表示第一参考信号和第二参考信号的时域位置、频域位置或极化方式中至少一项不同。Optionally, the first reference signal and the second reference signal differ in at least one of their time-domain position, frequency-domain position, or polarization. For example, the first reference signal and the second reference signal may differ in their time-domain position (e.g., the occupied frame, subframe, time slot, symbol, etc.), such as when the first and second reference signals can be time-division multiplexed. Another example is that the first and second reference signals may differ in their frequency-domain position, such as when the first and second reference signals can be frequency-division multiplexed, and the second reference signal does not necessarily need to be located at a pre-defined synchronization raster frequency point. Yet another example is that the first and second reference signals employ different polarization methods (e.g., linear polarization, left-hand circular polarization, right-hand circular polarization, elliptic polarization, etc.). Any two of the above three examples can be combined, or all three can be satisfied simultaneously, indicating that at least one of the time-domain position, frequency-domain position, or polarization of the first and second reference signals differs.
可选的,第一参考信号对应预定义的时域位置,第二参考信号的时域位置可变。例如,第一参考信号对应预定义的时域位置,表示第一参考信号有预定义的资源图样(pattern)。又例如,第二参考信号的时域位置可变,表示第二参考信号的资源图样可变,支持动态调度。例如,表3为第一参考信号的预定义的资源图样的几种可能的示例,假设表3以第一参考信号为SSB进行描述。Optionally, the first reference signal corresponds to a predefined time-domain location, while the time-domain location of the second reference signal is variable. For example, the first reference signal corresponding to a predefined time-domain location indicates that the first reference signal has a predefined resource pattern. As another example, the second reference signal having a variable time-domain location indicates that the resource pattern of the second reference signal is variable, supporting dynamic scheduling. For instance, Table 3 shows several possible examples of the predefined resource pattern of the first reference signal, assuming that Table 3 describes the first reference signal as an SSB.
表3
Table 3
其中,Case A表示SSB的子载波间隔(sub-carrier space,SCS)为15KHz,SSB的第一个符号的时域位置满足{2,8}+14×n,其中,n为时隙,并且限定了SSB最大个数。其他Case的含义类似,此处不再赘述。基于表3,第一节点可以确定第一参考信号的资源图样。第二参考信号的资源图样可变,表示第二参考信号的资源图样可以不局限于表3中的Case,还可以更灵活(例如第一个符号位置可变等),本申请不作限定。In this table, Case A indicates that the sub-carrier space (SCS) of the SSB is 15 kHz, and the time-domain position of the first symbol of the SSB satisfies {2, 8} + 14 × n, where n is the time slot, and the maximum number of SSBs is limited. The meanings of other Cases are similar and will not be repeated here. Based on Table 3, the first node can determine the resource pattern of the first reference signal. The resource pattern of the second reference signal is variable, meaning that the resource pattern of the second reference signal is not limited to the Cases in Table 3, and can be more flexible (e.g., the position of the first symbol can be variable), which is not limited in this application.
例如,图12为本申请提供的一种第一参考信号和第二参考信号的示意图。其中,第一参考信号如图12中的实线方框所示,第二参考信号如图12中的虚线方框所示,假设图12中的第二参考信号为周期信号。可见,第二周期大于第一周期,并且第一参考信号的资源图样(四个实线方框)和第二参考信号的资源图样(两个虚线方框)不同。For example, Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of a first reference signal and a second reference signal provided in this application. The first reference signal is shown as a solid box in Figure 12, and the second reference signal is shown as a dashed box in Figure 12. It is assumed that the second reference signal in Figure 12 is a periodic signal. It can be seen that the second period is greater than the first period, and the resource pattern of the first reference signal (four solid boxes) is different from the resource pattern of the second reference signal (two dashed boxes).
可选的,第一参考信号和第二参考信号满足准共址(QCL)关系。例如,第一参考信号和第二参考信号满足准共址关系,表示从第一参考信号可以推断第二参考信号的属性。Optionally, the first reference signal and the second reference signal satisfy a quasi-co-address (QCL) relationship. For example, the quasi-co-address relationship between the first reference signal and the second reference signal indicates that the properties of the second reference signal can be inferred from the first reference signal.
实施方式二:第一参考信号和第二参考信号为相同类型的参考信号,但是映射到不同类型的时域位置。例如,第一参考信号和第二参考信号为SSB同步信号,但是,第一参考信号映射至第一类型的时域位置(称为Type-1 Occasion),第二参考信号映射至第二类型的时域位置(称为Type-2 Occasion)。Implementation Method 2: The first reference signal and the second reference signal are reference signals of the same type, but they are mapped to different types of time domain locations. For example, the first reference signal and the second reference signal are SSB synchronization signals, but the first reference signal is mapped to a first type of time domain location (referred to as Type-1 Occasion), and the second reference signal is mapped to a second type of time domain location (referred to as Type-2 Occasion).
第一类型的时域位置满足第一周期。例如,第一参考信号映射的Occasion呈现周期性。第二类型的时域位置为非周期性的或者满足第二周期。例如,当第二类型的时域位置满足第二周期时,第二参考信号映射的Occasion呈现周期性,The first type of time-domain location satisfies the first period. For example, the occcasion of the first reference signal mapping is periodic. The second type of time-domain location is either aperiodic or satisfies the second period. For example, when the second type of time-domain location satisfies the second period, the occcasion of the second reference signal mapping is periodic.
具体的,第一周期与第二周期的实现可以参照上述实施方式一的相关描述,在此不再赘述。Specifically, the implementation of the first cycle and the second cycle can be referred to the relevant description of Implementation Method 1 above, and will not be repeated here.
可选的,第一参考信号和第二参考信号的时域位置、频域位置中至少一项不同。例如,第一参考信号和第二参考信号的时域位置不同,如第一参考信号和第二参考信号可以时分复用。又例如,第一参考信号和第二参考信号的频域位置不同,如第一参考信号和第二参考信号可以频分复用。上述两个举例可以只满足任意一个或同时满足,表示第一参考信号和第二参考信号的时域位置、频域位置中至少一项不同。Optionally, the time-domain position and frequency-domain position of the first reference signal and the second reference signal are different in at least one aspect. For example, the time-domain positions of the first reference signal and the second reference signal are different, such as when the first reference signal and the second reference signal can be time-division multiplexed. Another example is that the frequency-domain positions of the first reference signal and the second reference signal are different, such as when the first reference signal and the second reference signal can be frequency-division multiplexed. Either one of the above two examples or both can be satisfied, indicating that the time-domain position and frequency-domain position of the first reference signal and the second reference signal are different.
可选的,第一参考信号对应预定义的时域位置,第二参考信号的时域位置可变。具体的举例说明可以参考上述表3的相关描述,例如,基于表3,第一装置可以确定第一参考信号的资源图样。第二参考信号的资源图样可变,表示第二参考信号的资源图样可以不局限于表3中的Case,还可以更灵活(例如第一个符号位置可变等),本申请不作限定。Optionally, the first reference signal corresponds to a predefined time-domain position, while the time-domain position of the second reference signal is variable. Specific examples can be found in the relevant descriptions in Table 3 above. For instance, based on Table 3, the first device can determine the resource pattern of the first reference signal. The variable resource pattern of the second reference signal means that the resource pattern of the second reference signal is not limited to the Case in Table 3, and can be more flexible (e.g., the position of the first symbol can be variable), which is not limited in this application.
例如,图13为本申请提供的另一种第一参考信号和第二参考信号的示意图。其中,图13以第一参考信号和第二参考信号均为SSB同步信号为例,虚线方框所示的SSB映射至第二类型的时域位置,实线方框所示的SSB映射至第一类型的时域位置。For example, Figure 13 is a schematic diagram of another first reference signal and second reference signal provided in this application. In Figure 13, taking the first reference signal and the second reference signal as both being SSB synchronization signals as an example, the SSB shown in the dashed box is mapped to the second type of time domain position, and the SSB shown in the solid box is mapped to the first type of time domain position.
可选的,第一参考信号和第二参考信号满足准共址关系。例如,情况二中第一参考信号和第二参考信号可以是同一波束映射在不同的时隙,从而存在准共址关系。Optionally, the first reference signal and the second reference signal satisfy a quasi-co-location relationship. For example, in case two, the first reference signal and the second reference signal can be the same beam mapped to different time slots, thus exhibiting a quasi-co-location relationship.
可选的,第一类型的时域位置和第二类型的时域位置复用相同的SSB索引。例如,假设第一参考信号和第二参考信号为同一个SSB,同一个SSB映射至不同类型的Occasion,则第一类型的时域位置和第二类型的时域位置复用相同的SSB索引(相同的SSB索引指示同一个SSB)。可选的,后续切换过程中终端的传输配置指示状态(transmission configuration indicator state,TCI state)不变;例如,不同类型的Occasion复用相同的SSB索引,切换过程中终端的TCI state不变。Optionally, the first type of time-domain location and the second type of time-domain location reuse the same SSB index. For example, assuming the first reference signal and the second reference signal are the same SSB, and the same SSB maps to different types of Occasions, then the first type of time-domain location and the second type of time-domain location reuse the same SSB index (the same SSB index indicates the same SSB). Optionally, the terminal's transmission configuration indicator state (TCI state) remains unchanged during subsequent handover; for example, different types of Occasions reuse the same SSB index, and the terminal's TCI state remains unchanged during handover.
实施方式三:第一参考信号为SSB同步信号,第二参考信号为其他类型的参考信号(如跟踪参考信号(tracking reference signal,TRS)、信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal,CSI-RS)等),并且,第二参考信号与SSB同步信号存在准共址关系。Implementation Method 3: The first reference signal is the SSB synchronization signal, and the second reference signal is another type of reference signal (such as tracking reference signal (TRS), channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), etc.), and the second reference signal has a quasi-co-address relationship with the SSB synchronization signal.
第一参考信号为周期信号,且第一参考信号的周期为第一周期。第二参考信号为非周期信号或周期信号,当第二参考信号为周期信号时,第二参考信号的周期为第二周期。The first reference signal is a periodic signal, and the period of the first reference signal is the first period. The second reference signal is either an aperiodic signal or a periodic signal. When the second reference signal is a periodic signal, the period of the second reference signal is the second period.
具体的,第一周期与第二周期的实现可以参照上述实施方式一的相关描述,在此不再赘述。Specifically, the implementation of the first cycle and the second cycle can be referred to the relevant description of Implementation Method 1 above, and will not be repeated here.
可选的,第一参考信号和第二参考信号的时域位置、频域位置或极化方式中至少一项不同。例如,第一参考信号和第二参考信号的时域位置不同,如第一参考信号和第二参考信号可以时分复用。又例如,第一参考信号和第二参考信号的频域位置不同,如第一参考信号和第二参考信号可以频分复用。再例如,第一参考信号和第二参考信号采用不同的极化方式(如线极化、左旋圆极化、右旋圆极化、椭圆极化等)。上述三个举例可以任意两两组合或三个同时满足,表示第一参考信号和第二参考信号的时域位置、频域位置或极化方式中至少一项不同。Optionally, the first reference signal and the second reference signal differ in at least one of their time-domain position, frequency-domain position, or polarization. For example, the first reference signal and the second reference signal may differ in their time-domain position, such as by time-division multiplexing. Another example is that the first reference signal and the second reference signal may differ in their frequency-domain position, such as by frequency-division multiplexing. Yet another example is that the first reference signal and the second reference signal employ different polarization methods (such as linear polarization, left-hand circular polarization, right-hand circular polarization, elliptic polarization, etc.). Any two of the above examples can be combined, or all three can be satisfied simultaneously, indicating that the first reference signal and the second reference signal differ in at least one of their time-domain position, frequency-domain position, or polarization.
可选的,第一参考信号对应预定义的时域位置,第二参考信号的时域位置可变。具体的举例说明可以参考上述表3和图12的相关描述,例如,基于表3,第一装置可以确定第一参考信号的资源图样。第二参考信号的资源图样可变,表示第二参考信号的资源图样可以不局限于表3中的Case,还可以更灵活(例如第一个符号位置可变等),本申请不作限定。Optionally, the first reference signal corresponds to a predefined time-domain position, while the time-domain position of the second reference signal is variable. Specific examples can be found in Table 3 and Figure 12 above. For instance, based on Table 3, the first device can determine the resource pattern of the first reference signal. The variable resource pattern of the second reference signal means that the resource pattern of the second reference signal is not limited to the Case in Table 3, and can be more flexible (e.g., the position of the first symbol can be variable), which is not limited in this application.
结合上述三种实现方式,可选的,第一节点可以通过广播或多播的方式,发送第二参考信号(如第一节点通过其所属的IAB节点的MT发送第二参考信号),相应的,第二参考信号可以被除第一节点之外的其他节点(如至少一个第三节点)接收。为了方便描述,下面以第三节点接收第二参考信号为例进行描述。Combining the three implementation methods described above, optionally, the first node can send the second reference signal via broadcast or multicast (e.g., the first node sends the second reference signal through the MT of its affiliated IAB node). Correspondingly, the second reference signal can be received by other nodes besides the first node (e.g., at least one third node). For ease of description, the following description uses the example of a third node receiving the second reference signal.
示例性的,第三节点可以为地面节点或非地面节点。如图14所示,以第一节点位于IAB节点#1为例,IAB节点#1可以广播第二参考信号,进一步的,第二参考信号被IAB节点#2和/或宿主节点B接收,因此,IAB节点#2和/或宿主节点B可以视为第三节点。For example, the third node can be a ground node or a non-ground node. As shown in Figure 14, taking the first node as being located at IAB node #1 as an example, IAB node #1 can broadcast a second reference signal. Furthermore, the second reference signal is received by IAB node #2 and/or host node B. Therefore, IAB node #2 and/or host node B can be regarded as the third node.
可选的,第三节点可以对第二参考信号的信号质量进行测量,并对测量结果(即第二参考信号的信号质量)进行处理。Optionally, the third node can measure the signal quality of the second reference signal and process the measurement results (i.e., the signal quality of the second reference signal).
一种可能的实现中,第三节点可以根据第二参考信号的信号质量,确定是否需要切换当前接入的宿主节点(或该宿主节点的后代节点(即第三节点的父节点));例如,在第一节点为第三节点的父节点的情况下,若第二参考信号的信号质量较差,第三节点可以考虑接入其他节点(如切换至其他节点);在第一节点不为第三节点的父节点(或第三及节点的祖先节点)的情况下,若第二参考信号的信号质量较好,第三节点可以考虑接入第一节点(如切换至第一节点)。In one possible implementation, the third node can determine whether it needs to switch the currently connected host node (or the descendant node of the host node (i.e., the parent node of the third node)) based on the signal quality of the second reference signal. For example, if the first node is the parent node of the third node, and the signal quality of the second reference signal is poor, the third node can consider connecting to other nodes (e.g., switching to other nodes). If the first node is not the parent node of the third node (or the ancestor node of the third node), and the signal quality of the second reference signal is good, the third node can consider connecting to the first node (e.g., switching to the first node).
一种可能的实现中,第三节点还可以向第一节点告知第二参考信号的信号质量,从而,第一节点可以根据第二参考信号的信号质量确定是否对其他节点的通信造成干扰,进一步的,可以对其发送功率进行调整。In one possible implementation, the third node can also inform the first node of the signal quality of the second reference signal. Thus, the first node can determine whether the signal quality of the second reference signal interferes with the communication of other nodes, and further adjust its transmission power accordingly.
可选的,用于承载第一参考信号的资源与用于承载第二参考信号的资源不同。示例性的,第一参考信号与第二参考信号可以承载于不同的随机接入信道(random access channel,RACH)时机(RACH opportunity,RO);承载参考信号的资源也可以称为参考信号关联的资源,因此,也可以认为第一参考信号关联的RO与第一参考信号关联的RO不同。如图15所示,实线带阴影的方框表示为第一参考信号关联的RO;虚线带阴影的方框表示为第二参考信号关联的RO。Optionally, the resources used to carry the first reference signal are different from the resources used to carry the second reference signal. For example, the first and second reference signals can be carried on different random access channel (RACH) opportunities (ROs); the resources carrying the reference signals can also be called resources associated with the reference signals. Therefore, it can also be considered that the RO associated with the first reference signal is different from the RO associated with the second reference signal. As shown in Figure 15, the solid shaded box represents the RO associated with the first reference signal; the dashed shaded box represents the RO associated with the second reference signal.
可以理解的是,在移动场景中,终端设备切换小区(如IAB节点,或IAB-DU)的频率明显高于IAB节点、IAB-MT或IAB-DU(如第一节点)切换其接入的宿主节点的频率。因此,对于第一节点而言,其发送用于终端设备的小区搜索的参考信号的频率高于发送用于搜索宿主节点的参考信号的频率;也就是说,用于小区搜索的SSB的周期较短。Understandably, in mobile scenarios, the frequency with which terminal devices switch cells (such as IAB nodes or IAB-DUs) is significantly higher than the frequency with which IAB nodes, IAB-MTs, or IAB-DUs (such as the first node) switch their access to the host node. Therefore, for the first node, the frequency with which it sends reference signals for cell search for terminal devices is higher than the frequency with which it sends reference signals for searching for the host node; that is, the period of the SSB used for cell search is shorter.
若将用于小区搜索的SSB直接应用于宿主节点的搜索的过程中,由于相较于IAB-MT或IAB-DU搜索宿主节点的频率,小区搜索的频率较高(即SSB的周期较短),使得第一节点在无需执行宿主节点的搜索的时刻依旧发送SSB,从而造成大量的资源浪费。此外,还会造成SSB间的干扰(例如,无法区分SSB用于小区搜索还是用于宿主节点的搜索)。If the SSB used for cell search is directly applied to the host node search process, the frequency of cell search is much higher than that of IAB-MT or IAB-DU (i.e., the SSB period is shorter). This causes the first node to send SSBs even when it does not need to perform host node searches, resulting in a significant waste of resources. Furthermore, it can cause interference between SSBs (e.g., it becomes impossible to distinguish whether the SSB is used for cell search or host node search).
因此,第一节点将第一参考信号用于小区搜素,第二参考信号用于宿主节点的搜索,相较于将用于小区搜索的SSB直接应用于宿主节点的搜索的过程中的方案,能够节省资源;此外,还能够避免参考信号之间的干扰。Therefore, the first node uses the first reference signal for cell search and the second reference signal for host node search. Compared with the scheme of directly applying the SSB used for cell search to the host node search process, this can save resources. In addition, it can also avoid interference between reference signals.
可选的,第一节点还可以广播或向宿主节点(或第二节点)上报其能力信息。示例性的,第一节点可以在接入第二节点的过程中上报其能力信息,例如,能力信息可以承载于Msg5。或者,第一节点可以在接入第二节点之后上报其能力信息。Optionally, the first node may also broadcast or report its capability information to the host node (or the second node). For example, the first node may report its capability information during the process of connecting to the second node; for instance, the capability information may be carried on Msg5. Alternatively, the first node may report its capability information after connecting to the second node.
示例性的,第一节点可以通过第二指示信息指示其能力信息。具体的,如图16所示,在步骤S1002之后,该通信方法还可以包括如下步骤S1003:For example, the first node can indicate its capability information through the second indication information. Specifically, as shown in Figure 16, after step S1002, the communication method may further include the following step S1003:
S1003、第一节点向第二节点发送第二指示信息,相应的,第二节点接收来自第一节点的第二指示信息。其中,第二指示信息指示第一节点的能力信息。S1003, the first node sends a second indication message to the second node, and correspondingly, the second node receives the second indication message from the first node. The second indication message indicates the capability information of the first node.
示例性的,在第二节点位于宿主节点的情况下,第一节点向第二节点发送第二指示信息,可以理解为:第一节点向其接入的宿主节点发送第二指示信息。在第二节点位于IAB节点的情况下,第二节点接收到第二指示信息之后,可以向其父节点发送第二指示信息,直至第二指示信息传输至接入的宿主节点。For example, when the second node is located at the host node, the first node sending the second indication information to the second node can be understood as the first node sending the second indication information to the host node it has accessed. When the second node is located at the IAB node, after receiving the second indication information, the second node can send the second indication information to its parent node until the second indication information is transmitted to the accessed host node.
可选的,第一节点的能力信息可以包括以下至少一项信息:第一节点的类型、第一节点所属的IAB节点是否支持服务子节点、第一节点与第一节点所属的IAB节点中的MT是否支持同时切换、第一节点是否支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能。其中,第一节点的类型为非地面节点或地面节点,地面节点包括静止节点或移动节点,非地面节点包括静止节点或移动节点。Optionally, the capability information of the first node may include at least one of the following: the type of the first node, whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes, whether the first node and the MT in the IAB node to which the first node belongs support simultaneous switching, and whether the first node supports simultaneously having the functions of an IAB node and a host node. The type of the first node is either a non-ground node or a ground node. Ground nodes include stationary nodes or mobile nodes, and non-ground nodes include stationary nodes or mobile nodes.
示例性的,第二指示信息可以包括第一节点的类型、第一节点所属的IAB节点是否支持服务子节点、第一节点与第一节点所属的IAB节点中的MT是否支持同时切换、第一节点是否支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能中的至少一项,以实现直接指示第一节点的能力信息。For example, the second indication information may include at least one of the following: the type of the first node, whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes, whether the first node and the MT in the IAB node to which the first node belongs support simultaneous switching, and whether the first node supports having the functions of both an IAB node and a host node, so as to directly indicate the capability information of the first node.
或者,第一节点的类型与其所属的IAB节点是否支持服务子节点、与第一节点所属的IAB节点中的DU是否支持同时切换、支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能中的至少一项存在对应关系。例如,第一节点为非地面节点时,第一节点所属的IAB节点支持服务子节点、第一节点与第一节点所属的IAB节点中的MT支持同时切换,和/或,第一节点支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能;第一节点为地面节点时,第一节点所属的IAB节点不支持服务子节点、第一节点与第一节点所属的IAB节点中的MT不支持同时切换,和/或,第一节点不支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能;因此,第一指示信息可以指示第一节点的类型,以实现间接指示第一节点的其他特征(如第一节点所属的IAB节点是否支持服务子节点、第一节点与第一节点所属的IAB节点中的MT是否支持同时切换、第一节点是否支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能中的至少一项)。Alternatively, the type of the first node may correspond to at least one of the following: whether its IAB node supports serving child nodes; whether the DU in the IAB node supports simultaneous switching; or whether it supports simultaneously having the functions of both an IAB node and a host node. For example, when the first node is a non-terrestrial node, the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes; the first node and the MT in the IAB node to which the first node belongs support simultaneous switching; and/or, the first node supports simultaneously having the functions of both an IAB node and a host node. When the first node is a terrestrial node, the IAB node to which the first node belongs does not support serving child nodes; the first node and the MT in the IAB node to which the first node belongs do not support simultaneous switching; and/or, the first node does not support simultaneously having the functions of both an IAB node and a host node. Therefore, the first indication information can indicate the type of the first node to indirectly indicate other characteristics of the first node (such as whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes; whether the first node and the MT in the IAB node to which the first node belongs support simultaneous switching; and whether the first node supports simultaneously having the functions of both an IAB node and a host node).
具体的,第二指示信息可以包括第一节点的类型;或者,第一节点可以通过其所属的IAB节点的MT接入网络的过程中,承载用于请求接入的信息的资源指示第一节点的类型,从而实现间接指示第一节点的能力信息,此时,第二指示信息即为用于请求接入的信息。例如,该用于请求接入的信息可以承载于NTN SSB preamble中。Specifically, the second indication information may include the type of the first node; alternatively, the first node may indirectly indicate its capability information by carrying information for requesting access during the network access process of its affiliated IAB node's MT, using resources that carry access request information. In this case, the second indication information is the access request information. For example, this access request information may be carried in the NTN SSB preamble.
示例性的,第一节点的类型的实现,可以参照上述IAB节点的类型的相关描述,在此不再赘述。For example, the implementation of the type of the first node can be referred to the relevant description of the type of IAB node mentioned above, and will not be repeated here.
示例性的,第一节点所属的IAB节点也可以理解为:第一节点所处的IAB节点。例如第一节点位于IAB节点A,即第一节点为IAB节点A中的DU(即IAB-DU),此时,第一节点所属的IAB节点即为IAB节点A。For example, the IAB node to which the first node belongs can also be understood as: the IAB node where the first node is located. For example, if the first node is located in IAB node A, that is, the first node is DU (i.e., IAB-DU) in IAB node A, then the IAB node to which the first node belongs is IAB node A.
示例性的,宿主节点或核心网可以基于第一节点的类型,为第一节点所属的IAB节点配置合适的接入资源。具体的,接入资源可以为用于承载preamble的资源(如RO)。例如,在第一节点的类型为非地面节点的情况下,可以为第一节点配置专用的接入资源。用于第一节点切换宿主节点之后的接入过程。For example, the host node or core network can configure appropriate access resources for the IAB node to which the first node belongs, based on the type of the first node. Specifically, the access resources can be resources used to carry the preamble (such as RO). For instance, if the first node is a non-terrestrial node, dedicated access resources can be configured for the first node for the access process after the first node switches host nodes.
示例性的,宿主节点或核心网可以基于第一节点所属的IAB节点是否支持服务子节点,部署合适的IAB网络拓扑结构;例如,在第一节点所属的IAB节点支持服务子节点的情况下,第一节点接入网络后,可以考虑为第一节点所属的IAB节点接入一个或多个子节点,使得该一个或多个子节点可以通过第一节点接入宿主节点。在第一节点所属的IAB节点不支持服务子节点的情况下,无需为第一节点所属的IAB节点接入子节点。For example, the host node or core network can deploy a suitable IAB network topology based on whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes. For instance, if the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes, after the first node connects to the network, one or more child nodes can be connected to the IAB node to which the first node belongs, allowing these one or more child nodes to connect to the host node through the first node. If the IAB node to which the first node belongs does not support serving child nodes, there is no need to connect child nodes to the IAB node to which the first node belongs.
示例性的,宿主节点或核心网可以基于第一节点与第一节点所属的IAB节点中的MT是否支持同时切换,为第一节点配置合适的切换方式。例如,第一节点与第一节点所属的IAB节点中的MT支持同时切换的情况下,宿主节点或核心网可以为第一节点与第一节点所属的IAB节点中的MT配置相同的触发切换的时间和/或位置,相较于第一节点与第一节点所属的IAB节点中的MT不支持同时切换,宿主节点或核心网分别配置第一节点与第一节点所属的IAB节点中的MT的触发切换的时间和/或位置的方案,能够减小宿主节点或核心网指示切换触发的信令开销。For example, the host node or core network can configure a suitable handover method for the first node based on whether the MTs in the first node and the IAB node to which the first node belongs support simultaneous handover. For instance, if the first node and the MTs in the IAB node to which the first node belongs support simultaneous handover, the host node or core network can configure the same handover trigger time and/or location for the first node and the MTs in the IAB node to which the first node belongs. Compared to the scheme where the host node or core network configures the handover trigger time and/or location for the first node and the MTs in the IAB node to which the first node belongs separately, if the first node and the MTs in the IAB node to which the first node belongs do not support simultaneous handover, this can reduce the signaling overhead of the host node or core network in indicating the handover trigger.
应理解,IAB节点的功能指的是IAB节点能够服务至少一个终端设备;因此,第一节点具有IAB节点的功能指的是:第一节点能够服务至少一个终端设备,也就是说,第一节点所属的IAB节点能够服务至少一个终端设备。It should be understood that the function of an IAB node refers to the ability of an IAB node to serve at least one terminal device; therefore, the fact that the first node has the function of an IAB node means that the first node can serve at least one terminal device, that is, the IAB node to which the first node belongs can serve at least one terminal device.
宿主节点的功能指的是宿主节点能够通过NTN网关与核心网进行通信;因此,第一节点具有宿主节点的功能指的是,第一节点能够通过NTN网关与核心网进行通信。因此,第一节点是否支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能,可以理解为:第一节点是否支持通过NTN网关与核心网进行通信的同时,支持服务至少一个终端设备。第一节点是否支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能,也可以称为,第一节点是否支持IAB节点与宿主节点共址。The function of a host node refers to its ability to communicate with the core network through the NTN gateway. Therefore, the first node's host node function means that it can communicate with the core network through the NTN gateway. Thus, whether the first node supports simultaneously having the functions of an IAB node and a host node can be understood as whether the first node supports communicating with the core network through the NTN gateway while simultaneously serving at least one terminal device. Whether the first node supports simultaneously having the functions of an IAB node and a host node can also be referred to as whether the first node supports co-location of IAB nodes and host nodes.
示例性的,宿主节点或核心网可以基于第一节点是否支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能,部署合适的IAB网络拓扑结构;例如,第一节点支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能时,第一节点可以作为宿主节点通过NTN网关与核心网进行通信,同时,第一节点也可以为至少一个终端设备提供服务,第一节点不支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能时,若第一节点具有IAB节点的功能,此时第一节点只能作为IAB网络中的IAB节点,为至少一个终端设备提供服务;若第一节点具有宿主节点的功能,此时第一节点只能作为IAB网络中的宿主节点,通过NTN网关与核心网进行通信。For example, the host node or core network can deploy a suitable IAB network topology based on whether the first node supports the functions of both an IAB node and a host node. For instance, if the first node supports the functions of both an IAB node and a host node, the first node can act as a host node and communicate with the core network through the NTN gateway. At the same time, the first node can also provide services to at least one terminal device. If the first node does not support the functions of both an IAB node and a host node, and if the first node has the function of an IAB node, then the first node can only act as an IAB node in the IAB network and provide services to at least one terminal device. If the first node has the function of a host node, then the first node can only act as a host node in the IAB network and communicate with the core network through the NTN gateway.
在图17(如图17中的(a)和/或图17中的(b))所示的IAB网络拓扑结构中,在第一节点具有IAB节点的功能的情况下,第一节点可以位于图17中的(a)或图17中的(b)中的节点A或节点B;在第一节点具有宿主节点的功能的情况下,第一节点可以位于图17中的(b)中的节点C;在第一节点支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能的情况下,第一节点可以位于图17中的(a)中的节点C。In the IAB network topology shown in Figure 17 (as shown in Figure 17(a) and/or Figure 17(b)), if the first node has the function of an IAB node, the first node can be located at node A or node B in Figure 17(a) or Figure 17(b); if the first node has the function of a host node, the first node can be located at node C in Figure 17(b); if the first node supports the functions of both an IAB node and a host node, the first node can be located at node C in Figure 17(a).
示例性的,以上分别介绍了第一节点的能力信息包括不同参数(即第一节点的类型、第一节点所属的IAB节点是否支持服务子节点、第一节点与第一节点所属的IAB节点中的MT是否支持同时切换、第一节点是否支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能中的任一项)时宿主节点或核心网对该能力信息的处理,实际上述参数也可以结合使用,下面对能力信息包括多个参数时,宿主节点或核心网对多个参数结合使用的处理过程进行详细介绍。For example, the above describes how the host node or core network processes the capability information of the first node when it includes different parameters (i.e., the type of the first node, whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes, whether the MT in the first node and the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports simultaneous switching, and whether the first node supports having the functions of both an IAB node and a host node). In practice, the above parameters can also be used in combination. The following describes in detail the processing procedure of the host node or core network when multiple parameters are included in the capability information.
示例性的,宿主节点或核心网可以基于第一节点所属的IAB节点是否支持服务子节点与第一节点的类型,为第一节点配置其子节点的切换方式。如在第一节点所属的IAB节点支持服务子节点,且第一节点为非地面节点的情况下,目标宿主节点或核心网可以为第一节点所属的IAB节点的配置新的触发切换的时间和/或位置,用于触发第一节点所属的IAB节点切换之后的第一节点的子节点的切换。For example, the host node or core network can configure the handover method for the child nodes of the first node based on whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes and the type of the first node. If the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes and the first node is a non-terrestrial node, the target host node or core network can configure a new trigger handover time and/or location for the IAB node to which the first node belongs, to trigger the handover of the child nodes of the first node after the handover of the IAB node to which the first node belongs.
和/或,宿主节点或核心网可以基于第一节点是否支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能,以及是否支持服务子节点,配置触发第一节点具备的功能(如IAB功能、宿主节点的功能、或是否支持子节点中的任一项)的触发时段和/或触发事件。And/or, the host node or core network may configure the triggering period and/or triggering event for the functions (such as IAB functions, host node functions, or whether any of the child nodes are supported) of the first node based on whether the first node supports the functions of both IAB node and host node, and whether it supports serving child nodes.
具体的,触发事件可以与第一节点所处的位置、第一节点的承载业务、或第一节点与目标宿主节点之间的时延中的至少一项相关。例如,触发事件与第一节点所处的位置相关时,该触发事件为第一节点所处的位置与预设参考位置之间的距离或角度小于或等于第三阈值。触发事件与第一节点的承载业务相关时,该触发事件为第一节点承载的业务的吞吐量或缓冲器(buffer)中的业务量大于第四阈值。触发事件和第一节点与目标宿主节点之间的时延相关时,第一节点与目标宿主节点之间的通信时延大于第五阈值。示例性的,第三阈值、第四阈值、以及第五阈值可以是宿主节点或核心网为第一节点配置的。Specifically, the triggering event can be related to at least one of the following: the location of the first node, the services carried by the first node, or the latency between the first node and the target host node. For example, when the triggering event is related to the location of the first node, the triggering event is that the distance or angle between the location of the first node and the preset reference location is less than or equal to a third threshold. When the triggering event is related to the services carried by the first node, the triggering event is that the throughput of the services carried by the first node or the amount of traffic in the buffer is greater than a fourth threshold. When the triggering event is related to the latency between the first node and the target host node, the communication latency between the first node and the target host node is greater than a fifth threshold. For example, the third, fourth, and fifth thresholds can be configured for the first node by the host node or the core network.
以图17(图17中的(a)和/或图17中的(b))所示的节点A与节点B均具备IAB节点的功能,且支持服务子节点;节点C支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能,且支持服务子节点,第一节点可以位于节点A、节点B、或节点C中的任一项为例,第一节点具备的功能与触发该功能的触发时段之间可以满足如表4所示的关系:Taking Node A and Node B as shown in Figure 17 (Figure 17(a) and/or Figure 17(b)) as examples, both Node A and Node B have the functions of IAB nodes and support service child nodes; Node C supports having the functions of both IAB nodes and host nodes, and also supports service child nodes. The first node can be located in any of Node A, Node B, or Node C. The relationship between the functions of the first node and the triggering time of that function can satisfy the relationship shown in Table 4.
表4
Table 4
在上述表4中,宿主节点或核心网可以配置在时段#1(例如,t1-t2时段,其中,t1小于t2,t1与t2均为正整数)触发节点A的IAB节点的功能,也就是说,在时段#1内节点A具备IAB节点的功能;此外,时段#1内,节点A可以支持服务子节点,或者,也可以不支持服务子节点。在时段#2触发节点A不支持服务节点的功能,也就是说,在时段#2内节点A不支持服务节点;此外,时段#2内,节点A可以具备IAB节点的功能,或者,也可以不具备IAB节点的功能。In Table 4 above, the host node or core network can be configured to trigger the IAB node function of node A in time period #1 (e.g., time period t1-t2, where t1 is less than t2, and both t1 and t2 are positive integers). That is, node A has the IAB node function during time period #1. Furthermore, during time period #1, node A may or may not support serving child nodes. In time period #2, node A may be configured to not support serving child nodes. That is, during time period #2, node A does not support serving child nodes. Furthermore, during time period #2, node A may or may not have the IAB node function.
类似的,宿主节点或核心网可以配置在时段#3触发节点B的IAB节点的功能;此外,时段#3内,节点B可以支持服务子节点,或者,也可以不支持服务子节点。在时段#4触发节点B不支持服务节点的功能;此外,时段#4内,节点B可以具备IAB节点的功能,或者,也可以不具备IAB节点的功能。Similarly, the host node or core network can be configured to trigger the IAB node function of node B in time period #3; furthermore, during time period #3, node B may or may not support serving child nodes. In time period #4, node B may or may not support serving child nodes; furthermore, during time period #4, node B may or may not possess the IAB node function.
宿主节点或核心网可以配置在时段#5触发节点C的宿主节点的功能;时段#5内,节点C可以同时具备IAB节点的功能,或者,也可以不具备IAB节点的功能;此外,时段#5内,节点C可以支持服务子节点,或者,也可以不支持服务子节点。在时段#6触发节点C的IAB节点的功能;时段#6内,节点C可以同时具备宿主节点的功能,或者,也可以不具备宿主节点的功能;此外,时段#6内,节点C可以支持服务子节点,或者,也可以不支持服务子节点。在时段#7触发节点C不支持服务节点的功能;此外,时段#7内,节点B可以具备IAB节点和/或宿主节点的功能,或者,也可以不具备IAB节点和/或宿主节点的功能。示例性的,时段#1~时段#7可以相同或不同,本申请实施例不予限制。The host node or core network can be configured to trigger the host node function of node C in time period #5. During time period #5, node C may or may not have the function of an IAB node. Furthermore, during time period #5, node C may or may not support service child nodes. The IAB node function of node C is triggered in time period #6. During time period #6, node C may or may not have the function of a host node. Furthermore, during time period #6, node C may or may not support service child nodes. The function of node C not supporting service nodes is triggered in time period #7. Furthermore, during time period #7, node C may or may not have the function of an IAB node and/or a host node. For example, time periods #1 to #7 may be the same or different, and this embodiment does not impose such limitations.
以第一节点可以位于节点A、节点B、或节点C中的任一项为例,第一节点具备的功能与触发该功能的触发事件之间可以满足如表5所示的关系:Taking the example that the first node can be located in any of node A, node B, or node C, the relationship between the function of the first node and the triggering event that triggers the function can satisfy the relationship shown in Table 5:
表5
Table 5
在上述表5中,宿主节点或核心网可以配置触发事件#1时,节点A具备IAB节点的功能,且节点A不支持服务子节点。类似的,宿主节点或核心网可以配置触发事件#2时,节点B具备IAB节点的功能,且节点B不支持服务子节点。宿主节点或核心网可以配置触发事件#3时,节点C同时具备IAB节点与宿主节点的功能,且节点C不支持服务子节点。In Table 5 above, when the host node or core network can be configured to trigger event #1, node A has the functionality of an IAB node, but node A does not support serving child nodes. Similarly, when the host node or core network can be configured to trigger event #2, node B has the functionality of an IAB node, but node B does not support serving child nodes. When the host node or core network can be configured to trigger event #3, node C has both the functionality of an IAB node and a host node, but node C does not support serving child nodes.
其中,事件#1、事件#2、以及事件#3可以与第一节点所处的位置、第一节点的承载业务、或第一节点与目标宿主节点之间的时延中的至少一项相关。事件#1、事件#2、以及事件#3可以相同或不同。具体的,事件#1、事件#2、以及事件#3的实现可以参见上述触发事件的相关描述,在此不再赘述。Events #1, #2, and #3 can be related to at least one of the following: the location of the first node, the services carried by the first node, or the latency between the first node and the target host node. Events #1, #2, and #3 can be the same or different. For details on the implementation of events #1, #2, and #3, please refer to the descriptions of the triggering events above; they will not be repeated here.
或者,不同节点的功能可以是由触发时段与触发事件共同触发的,即上述表2与表3可以合并为如表6所示的内容:Alternatively, the functions of different nodes can be triggered by both the triggering time period and the triggering event, meaning that Tables 2 and 3 above can be combined into the content shown in Table 6:
表6
Table 6
在上述表6中,宿主节点或核心网可以配置触发事件#1时,在时段#1触发节点A的IAB节点的功能;此外,时段#1内,节点A可以支持服务子节点,或者,也可以不支持服务子节点。在时段#2触发节点A不支持服务节点的功能;此外,时段#2内,节点A可以具备IAB节点的功能,或者,也可以不具备IAB节点的功能。类似的,宿主节点或核心网可以配置触发事件#2时,在时段#3触发节点B的IAB节点的功能;此外,时段#3内,节点B可以支持服务子节点,或者,也可以不支持服务子节点。在时段#4触发节点B不支持服务节点的功能;此外,时段#4内,节点B可以具备IAB节点的功能,或者,也可以不具备IAB节点的功能。目标宿主节点或核心网可以配置触发事件#3时,在时段#5触发节点C的宿主节点的功能;时段#5内,节点C可以同时具备IAB节点的功能,或者,也可以不具备IAB节点的功能;此外,时段#5内,节点C可以支持服务子节点,或者,也可以不支持服务子节点。在时段#6触发节点C的IAB节点的功能;时段#6内,节点C可以同时具备宿主节点的功能,或者,也可以不具备宿主节点的功能;此外,时段#6内,节点C可以支持服务子节点,或者,也可以不支持服务子节点。在时段#7触发节点C不支持服务节点的功能;此外,时段#7内,节点B可以具备IAB节点和/或宿主节点的功能,或者,也可以不具备IAB节点和/或宿主节点的功能。In Table 6 above, the host node or core network can be configured to trigger the IAB node function of node A during time period #1 when event #1 is triggered. Furthermore, during time period #1, node A may or may not support serving child nodes. During time period #2, node A may not support serving node functions; furthermore, during time period #2, node A may or may not possess IAB node functions. Similarly, the host node or core network can be configured to trigger the IAB node function of node B during time period #3 when event #2 is triggered. Furthermore, during time period #3, node B may or may not support serving child nodes. During time period #4, node B may or may not support serving node functions; furthermore, during time period #4, node B may or may not possess IAB node functions. When the target host node or core network is configured to trigger event #3, the host node function of node C will be triggered in time period #5. During time period #5, node C may or may not have the functions of an IAB node. Furthermore, during time period #5, node C may or may not support service child nodes. The IAB node function of node C will be triggered in time period #6. During time period #6, node C may or may not have the functions of a host node. Furthermore, during time period #6, node C may or may not support service child nodes. The service node function of node C will not be supported in time period #7. Furthermore, during time period #7, node C may or may not have the functions of an IAB node and/or a host node.
需要说明的是,上述表4~表6示例性的描述了节点的功能与触发该功能的触发时段和/或触发事件之间的关系,实际上节点的功能与触发该功能的触发时段和/或触发事件之间的对应关系,也可以是除上述关系之外的其他任何可能的关系,其实现与上述表4~表6中节点的功能与触发该功能的触发时段和/或触发事件之间的关系的实现类似,具体可以参见上述表4~表6的相关描述,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that Tables 4 to 6 above exemplarily describe the relationship between the function of a node and the triggering time and/or triggering event that triggers that function. In reality, the correspondence between the function of a node and the triggering time and/or triggering event that triggers that function can also be any other possible relationship besides the above relationship. Its implementation is similar to the implementation of the relationship between the function of a node and the triggering time and/or triggering event that triggers that function in Tables 4 to 6 above. For details, please refer to the relevant descriptions in Tables 4 to 6 above, which will not be repeated here.
基于该可选的方案,第一节点可以向宿主节点上报其能力信息,使得宿主节点或核心网能够根据该能力信息为第一节点配置合适的配置信息;如为第一节点配置合适的切换方式、接入资源等,从而提升移动性管理的有效性。Based on this optional scheme, the first node can report its capability information to the host node, so that the host node or core network can configure appropriate configuration information for the first node according to the capability information, such as configuring appropriate handover methods and access resources for the first node, thereby improving the effectiveness of mobility management.
可选的,第二指示信息还可以指示第一节点的能力信息的生效时段,和/或,第一节点的能力信息的生效区域。Optionally, the second indication information may also indicate the effective period of the first node's capability information and/or the effective area of the first node's capability information.
示例性的,以第二指示信息还指示第一节点的能力信息的生效时段和生效区域为例,第一节点的能力信息、生效时段、以及生效区域之间的可以满足如表7所示的关系:For example, taking the second indication information as also indicating the effective period and effective area of the first node's capability information, the capability information, effective period, and effective area of the first node can satisfy the relationship shown in Table 7:
表7
Table 7
在上述表7中,在时段#1内,第一节点位于区域#1内时,第一节点所属的IAB节点支持服务子节点;在时段#2内,第一节点位于区域#2内时,第一节点与其所属IAB节点的MT支持同时切换;在时段#3内,第一节点位于区域#3内时,第一节点支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能。In Table 7 above, during time period #1, when the first node is located in region #1, the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes; during time period #2, when the first node is located in region #2, the MT of the first node and its IAB node to which it belongs supports simultaneous switching; during time period #3, when the first node is located in region #3, the first node supports having the functions of both an IAB node and a host node.
具体的,时段#1、时段#2、与时段#3可以相同或不同;进一步的,时段#1、时段#2、与时段#3不同的情况下,时段#1、时段#2、与时段#3之间可以存在重叠。类似的,区域#1、区域#2、与区域#3可以相同或不同;进一步的,区域#1、区域#2、与区域#3不同的情况下,区域#1、区域#2、与区域#3之间可以存在重叠。Specifically, time periods #1, #2, and #3 can be the same or different; furthermore, if time periods #1, #2, and #3 are different, there can be overlap between them. Similarly, regions #1, #2, and #3 can be the same or different; furthermore, if regions #1, #2, and #3 are different, there can be overlap between them.
基于该可选的方案,第一节点还可以向宿主节点上报其能力信息的生效时段和/或生效区域,使得宿主节点或核心网能够根据能力信息的生效时段和/或生效区域,为第一节点配置合适的配置信息;如为第一节点配置合适用于触发其不同功能的触发时段和/或出发事件,从而提升移动性管理的有效性。Based on this optional scheme, the first node can also report the effective period and/or effective area of its capability information to the host node, so that the host node or core network can configure appropriate configuration information for the first node according to the effective period and/or effective area of the capability information; such as configuring appropriate triggering periods and/or triggering events for the first node to trigger its different functions, thereby improving the effectiveness of mobility management.
可以理解的是,以上各个实施例中,由第一节点实现的方法和/或步骤,也可以由实现部分或全部第一节点功能的设备、部件(例如处理器、电路、芯片、或芯片系统等)实现;由第二节点实现的方法和/或步骤,也可以由实现部分或全部第一节点功能的设备、部件(例如处理器、电路、芯片、或芯片系统等)实现。其中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,或者,芯片系统可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。It is understood that, in the above embodiments, the methods and/or steps implemented by the first node can also be implemented by devices or components (e.g., processors, circuits, chips, or chip systems) that implement some or all of the functions of the first node; similarly, the methods and/or steps implemented by the second node can also be implemented by devices or components (e.g., processors, circuits, chips, or chip systems) that implement some or all of the functions of the first node. The chip system can be composed of chips, or it can include chips and other discrete devices.
可以理解的是,该通信装置为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。It is understood that, in order to achieve the aforementioned functions, the communication device includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of each function. Those skilled in the art should readily recognize that, based on the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein, this application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in hardware or by computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法实施例对通信装置进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。This application embodiment can divide the communication device into functional modules according to the above method embodiment. For example, each function can be divided into a separate functional module, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. The integrated module can be implemented in hardware or as a software functional module. It should be noted that the module division in this application embodiment is illustrative and only represents one logical functional division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
图18示出了一种通信装置1800的结构示意图。该通信装置1800包括处理模块1801和收发模块1802。该通信装置1800可以用于实现上述第一节点或第二节点所述的功能。Figure 18 shows a schematic diagram of a communication device 1800. The communication device 1800 includes a processing module 1801 and a transceiver module 1802. The communication device 1800 can be used to implement the functions described in the first or second node above.
在一些实施例中,该通信装置1800还可以包括存储模块(图18中未示出),用于存储程序指令和数据。In some embodiments, the communication device 1800 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG18) for storing program instructions and data.
在一些实施例中,收发模块1802,也可以称为收发单元用以实现发送和/或接收功能。该收发模块1802可以由收发电路、收发机、收发器、输入输出接口或者通信接口构成。In some embodiments, the transceiver module 1802, also referred to as a transceiver unit, is used to implement sending and/or receiving functions. The transceiver module 1802 may consist of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver unit, an input/output interface, or a communication interface.
在一些实施例中,收发模块1802,可以包括接收模块和发送模块,分别用于执行上述方法实施例中由上述第一节点或第二节点执行的接收和发送类的步骤,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程;处理模块1801,可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由上述第一节点或第二节点执行的处理类(例如确定等)的步骤,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。In some embodiments, the transceiver module 1802 may include a receiving module and a sending module, respectively configured to perform receiving and sending steps performed by the first node or the second node in the above method embodiments, and/or other processes to support the technology described herein; the processing module 1801 may be configured to perform processing steps (e.g., determination) performed by the first node or the second node in the above method embodiments, and/or other processes to support the technology described herein.
在该通信装置1800用于实现上述第一节点的功能时:When the communication device 1800 is used to implement the function of the first node mentioned above:
在一些实施例中,收发模块1802,用于接收第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示多组配置信息,多组配置信息的触发条件不同。处理模块1801,用于根据第一组配置信息,进行通信,多组配置信息包括第一组配置信息。In some embodiments, the transceiver module 1802 is configured to receive first indication information, which indicates multiple sets of configuration information, each set of configuration information having different triggering conditions. The processing module 1801 is configured to perform communication based on the first set of configuration information, wherein the multiple sets of configuration information include the first set of configuration information.
可选的,收发模块1802,还用于接收来自第二节点的第一指示信息,第二节点位于宿主节点,或者,第二节点位于宿主节点的后代节点。Optionally, the transceiver module 1802 is also configured to receive first indication information from a second node, which is located on the host node, or the second node is located on a descendant node of the host node.
可选的,处理模块1801,还用于在满足第一组配置信息对应的触发条件的情况下,根据第一组配置信息,进行通信。Optionally, the processing module 1801 is also used to communicate according to the first set of configuration information when the triggering conditions corresponding to the first set of configuration information are met.
可选的,收发模块1802,还用于发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息指示第一节点的能力信息。Optionally, the transceiver module 1802 is also used to send second indication information, which indicates the capability information of the first node.
可选的,处理模块1801,还用于在第一时刻根据第一组配置信息,进行通信;收发模块1802,还用于在第二时刻根据第二组配置信息,进行通信,多组配置信息包括第二组配置信息,第二时刻位于第一时刻之后。Optionally, the processing module 1801 is also used to communicate based on the first set of configuration information at a first moment; the transceiver module 1802 is also used to communicate based on the second set of configuration information at a second moment, wherein the multiple sets of configuration information include the second set of configuration information, and the second moment is located after the first moment.
在该通信装置1800用于实现上述第二节点的功能时:When the communication device 1800 is used to implement the function of the second node mentioned above:
在一些实施例中,处理模块1801,用于确定第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示多组配置信息,多组配置信息的触发条件不同。收发模块1802,用于发送第一指示信息。In some embodiments, the processing module 1801 is configured to determine first indication information, which indicates multiple sets of configuration information, each set of configuration information having different triggering conditions. The transceiver module 1802 is configured to send the first indication information.
可选的,收发模块1802,还用于接收来自第二节点的父节点的第一指示信息,第二节点的父节点的位于宿主节点,或者,第二节点的父节点的位于宿主节点的后代节点。Optionally, the transceiver module 1802 is also configured to receive first indication information from the parent node of the second node, wherein the parent node of the second node is located on the host node, or the parent node of the second node is located on a descendant node of the host node.
可选的,收发模块1802,还用于接收第二指示信息,第二指示信息指示第一节点的能力信息。Optionally, the transceiver module 1802 is also used to receive second indication information, which indicates the capability information of the first node.
结合上述两种实施例,可选的,第一节点的能力信息包括以下至少一项信息:第一节点的类型,第一节点的类型为非地面节点或地面节点,地面节点包括静止节点或移动节点,非地面节点包括静止节点或移动节点;第一节点所属的IAB节点是否支持服务子节点;第一节点与第一节点所属的IAB节点中的MT是否支持同时切换;第一节点所属的IAB节点是否支持同时具有IAB节点与宿主节点的功能。In combination with the two embodiments described above, optionally, the capability information of the first node includes at least one of the following: the type of the first node, which is either a non-ground node or a ground node; ground nodes include stationary nodes or mobile nodes; non-ground nodes include stationary nodes or mobile nodes; whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports serving child nodes; whether the MT in the first node and the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports simultaneous switching; and whether the IAB node to which the first node belongs supports simultaneously having the functions of both an IAB node and a host node.
结合上述两种实施例,可选的,第二指示信息还指示能力信息的生效段,和/或,能力信息的生效区域。In combination with the two embodiments described above, optionally, the second indication information may also indicate the effective segment of the capability information and/or the effective area of the capability information.
结合上述两种实施例,可选的,多组配置信息中的任意一组配置信息指示以下至少一项信息:标识、触发条件、第一节点的覆盖范围、第一路径的信息、第一节点的地址信息、第一节点的寻呼区域、第一类参考信号配置信息、或第二类参考信号配置信息;其中,触发条件用于触发配置信息,第一路径为第一节点与第一节点接入的宿主节点之间的传输路径,第一类参考信号配置信息用于传输第一参考信号,第二类参考信号配置信息用于传输第二参考信号。In combination with the above two embodiments, optionally, any one of the multiple sets of configuration information indicates at least one of the following: identifier, trigger condition, coverage area of the first node, information of the first path, address information of the first node, paging area of the first node, configuration information of the first type of reference signal, or configuration information of the second type of reference signal; wherein, the trigger condition is used to trigger the configuration information, the first path is the transmission path between the first node and the host node to which the first node is connected, the configuration information of the first type of reference signal is used to transmit the first reference signal, and the configuration information of the second type of reference signal is used to transmit the second reference signal.
结合上述两种实施例,可选的,第一组配置信息指示的触发条件可以包括以下至少一项:第一节点的本地时钟位于第一时段内;第一节点与参考位置之间的距离小于或等于第一阈值;第一节点与参考位置之间的角度小于或等于第二阈值。In combination with the two embodiments described above, optionally, the triggering condition indicated by the first set of configuration information may include at least one of the following: the local clock of the first node is within a first time period; the distance between the first node and the reference position is less than or equal to a first threshold; the angle between the first node and the reference position is less than or equal to a second threshold.
结合上述两种实施例,可选的,配置信息指示第一节点的覆盖范围,包括:第一组配置信息指示至少一个小区,第一节点管理的小区包括至少一个小区,第一节点的覆盖范围包括至少一个小区的覆盖范围。In combination with the above two embodiments, optionally, the configuration information indicating the coverage of the first node includes: the first set of configuration information indicating at least one cell, the cells managed by the first node including at least one cell, and the coverage of the first node including the coverage of at least one cell.
结合上述两种实施例,可选的,配置信息指示第一节点的寻呼区域,包括:配置信息指示至少一个TAC,第一节点的寻呼区域包括至少一个TAC对应的至少一个TA;和/或,配置信息指示至少一个RAC,第一节点的寻呼区域包括至少一个TAC对应的至少一个RA。In combination with the above two embodiments, optionally, the configuration information indicating the paging area of the first node includes: the configuration information indicating at least one TAC, and the paging area of the first node including at least one TA corresponding to at least one TAC; and/or, the configuration information indicating at least one RAC, and the paging area of the first node including at least one RA corresponding to at least one TAC.
结合上述两种实施例,可选的,第一参考信号与第二参考信号的信号类型不同。In combination with the above two embodiments, optionally, the first reference signal and the second reference signal have different signal types.
结合上述两种实施例,可选的,第一参考信号的周期为第一周期,第二参考信号为非周期信号或第二参考信号的周期为第二周期,第二周期大于第一周期。Combining the two embodiments described above, optionally, the period of the first reference signal is a first period, and the second reference signal is an aperiodic signal, or the period of the second reference signal is a second period, and the second period is greater than the first period.
结合上述两种实施例,可选的,第一参考信号和第二参考信号满足准共址关系。Combining the two embodiments described above, optionally, the first reference signal and the second reference signal satisfy a quasi-co-address relationship.
结合上述两种实施例,可选的,第一参考信号和第二参考信号的时域位置、频域位置或极化方式中至少一项不同。In combination with the above two embodiments, optionally, at least one of the time domain position, frequency domain position, or polarization mode of the first reference signal and the second reference signal is different.
结合上述两种实施例,可选的,第一参考信号对应预定义的时域位置;第二参考信号的时域位置可变。Combining the two embodiments described above, optionally, the first reference signal corresponds to a predefined time-domain position; the time-domain position of the second reference signal is variable.
结合上述两种实施例,可选的,第一参考信号和第二参考信号为SSB信号;第一参考信号映射至第一类型的时域位置,第一类型的时域位置满足第一周期;第二参考信号映射至第二类型的时域位置,第二类型的时域位置为非周期性的或者满足第二周期,第二周期大于第一周期。Combining the two embodiments described above, optionally, the first reference signal and the second reference signal are SSB signals; the first reference signal is mapped to a time-domain position of a first type, and the time-domain position of the first type satisfies a first period; the second reference signal is mapped to a time-domain position of a second type, and the time-domain position of the second type is non-periodic or satisfies a second period, the second period being greater than the first period.
结合上述两种实施例,可选的,第一类型的时域位置和第二类型的时域位置复用相同的SSB索引。Combining the two embodiments described above, optionally, the first type of time-domain location and the second type of time-domain location reuse the same SSB index.
结合上述两种实施例,可选的,第一指示信息承载于RRC信令、F1-AP消息、或Xn-AP消息中的任一项中。In combination with the two embodiments described above, optionally, the first indication information is carried in any one of RRC signaling, F1-AP message, or Xn-AP message.
其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。All relevant content of each step involved in the above method embodiments can be referenced from the functional description of the corresponding functional module, and will not be repeated here.
在本申请中,该通信装置1800可以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现。这里的“模块”可以指特定专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),电路,执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器和存储器,集成逻辑电路,和/或其他可以提供上述功能的器件。In this application, the communication device 1800 can be presented in an integrated manner, divided into various functional modules. Here, "module" can refer to an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a circuit, a processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuits, and/or other devices that can provide the above functions.
在一些实施例中,当图18中的通信装置1800是芯片或芯片系统时,收发模块1802的功能/实现过程可以通过芯片或芯片系统的输入输出接口(或通信接口)实现,处理模块1801的功能/实现过程可以通过芯片或芯片系统的处理器(或者处理电路)实现。In some embodiments, when the communication device 1800 in FIG18 is a chip or chip system, the function/implementation process of the transceiver module 1802 can be implemented through the input/output interface (or communication interface) of the chip or chip system, and the function/implementation process of the processing module 1801 can be implemented through the processor (or processing circuit) of the chip or chip system.
由于本实施例提供的通信装置1800可执行上述方法,因此其所能获得的技术效果可参考上述方法实施例,在此不再赘述。Since the communication device 1800 provided in this embodiment can execute the above method, the technical effects it can achieve can be referred to the above method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
作为一种可能的产品形态,本申请实施例所述的第一节点或第二节点,还可以使用下述来实现:一个或多个现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)、可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)、控制器、状态机、门逻辑、分立硬件部件、任何其它适合的电路、或者能够执行本申请通篇所描述的各种功能的电路的任意组合。As a possible product form, the first node or the second node described in the embodiments of this application can also be implemented using one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), programmable logic devices (PLDs), controllers, state machines, gate logic, discrete hardware components, any other suitable circuits, or any combination of circuits capable of performing the various functions described throughout this application.
作为另一种可能的产品形态,本申请实施例所述的第一节点或第二节点,可以由一般性的总线体系结构来实现。为了便于说明,参见图19,图19是本申请实施例提供的通信装置1900的结构示意图,该通信装置1900包括处理器1901。该通信装置1900可以为第一节点,或其中的芯片或芯片系统;或者,该通信装置1900可以为第二节点,或其中的芯片或模块。图19仅示出了通信装置1900的主要部件。As another possible product form, the first node or second node described in this application embodiment can be implemented using a general bus architecture. For ease of explanation, refer to FIG19, which is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device 1900 provided in an embodiment of this application. The communication device 1900 includes a processor 1901. The communication device 1900 can be a first node, or a chip or chip system therein; or, the communication device 1900 can be a second node, or a chip or module therein. FIG19 only shows the main components of the communication device 1900.
可以理解的是,通信装置1900包括例如模块、单元、元件、电路、或接口等必要形式的means,以适当地配置在一起以执行本实施例所述的通信方法。所述通信装置1900可以是上述图1~图8任一项中的IAB节点、宿主节点、网络设备、终端设备、核心网或者其他设备,也可以是这些设备中的部件(例如芯片),用以实现上述方法实施例中描述的通信方法。通信装置1900包括一个或多个处理器1901。所述处理器1901可以是通用处理器或者专用处理器等。例如可以是基带处理器、或中央处理器。基带处理器可以用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器可以用于对通信装置(如,RAN节点、终端、或芯片等)进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。It is understood that the communication device 1900 includes means of the necessary form, such as modules, units, elements, circuits, or interfaces, to be appropriately configured together to perform the communication method described in this embodiment. The communication device 1900 may be an IAB node, host node, network device, terminal device, core network, or other device as shown in any of Figures 1 to 8 above, or it may be a component (e.g., a chip) within these devices, used to implement the communication method described in the above method embodiments. The communication device 1900 includes one or more processors 1901. The processor 1901 may be a general-purpose processor or a dedicated processor, for example, a baseband processor or a central processing unit. The baseband processor can be used to process communication protocols and communication data, and the central processing unit can be used to control the communication device (e.g., RAN node, terminal, or chip), execute software programs, and process data from the software programs.
可选的,在一种可能的设计中,处理器1901可以包括程序1903(有时也可以称为代码或指令),所述程序1903可以在所述处理器1901上被运行,使得所述通信装置1900执行上述实施例中描述的通信方法。Optionally, in one possible design, the processor 1901 may include a program 1903 (sometimes referred to as code or instructions) that can be run on the processor 1901 to cause the communication device 1900 to perform the communication method described in the above embodiments.
在又一种可能的设计中,通信装置1900包括电路(图19未示出),所述电路用于实现上述实施例中的第一节点或第二节点所述的功能。In another possible design, the communication device 1900 includes circuitry (not shown in FIG19) for implementing the functions described in the first or second node of the above embodiments.
可选的,所述通信装置1900中可以包括一个或多个存储器1902,其上存有程序1904(有时也可以称为代码或指令),所述程序1904可在所述存储器1902上被运行,使得所述通信装置1900执行上述实施例中描述的通信方法。Optionally, the communication device 1900 may include one or more memories 1902 storing a program 1904 (sometimes referred to as code or instructions), which can be run on the memory 1902 to cause the communication device 1900 to perform the communication method described in the above embodiments.
可选的,所述处理器1901和/或存储器1902中可以包括AI模块1907和/或1908,所述AI模块用于实现AI相关的功能。所述AI模块可以是通过软件,硬件,或软硬结合的方式实现。例如,AI模块可以包括RIC模块。例如AI模块可以是近实时RIC或者非实时RIC。Optionally, the processor 1901 and/or memory 1902 may include AI modules 1907 and/or 1908, which are used to implement AI-related functions. The AI module may be implemented through software, hardware, or a combination of both. For example, the AI module may include a RIC module. For example, the AI module may be a near real-time RIC or a non-real-time RIC.
可选的,所述处理器1901和/或存储器1902中还可以存储有数据。所述处理器和存储器可以单独设置,也可以集成在一起。Optionally, the processor 1901 and/or memory 1902 may also store data. The processor and memory may be configured separately or integrated together.
可选的,所述通信装置1900还可以包括收发器1905和/或天线1906。所述处理器1901有时也可以称为处理单元,对通信装置(例如RAN节点或终端)进行控制。所述收发器1905有时也可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等,用于通过天线1906实现通信装置的收发功能。Optionally, the communication device 1900 may further include a transceiver 1905 and/or an antenna 1906. The processor 1901, sometimes referred to as a processing unit, controls the communication device (e.g., a RAN node or terminal). The transceiver 1905, sometimes referred to as a transceiver unit, transceiver, transceiver circuit, or transceiver, is used to realize the transmission and reception functions of the communication device through the antenna 1906.
在一些实施例中,在硬件实现上,本领域的技术人员可以想到上述通信装置1800可以采用图19所示的通信装置1900的形式。In some embodiments, those skilled in the art will recognize that the above-described communication device 1800 can be implemented in the form of the communication device 1900 shown in FIG19.
作为一种示例,图18中的处理模块1801的功能/实现过程可以通过图19所示的通信装置1900中的处理器1901调用存储器1902中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。图18中的收发模块1802的功能/实现过程可以通过图19所示的通信装置1900中的收发器1905来实现。As an example, the function/implementation of the processing module 1801 in Figure 18 can be achieved by the processor 1901 in the communication device 1900 shown in Figure 19 calling computer execution instructions stored in the memory 1902. The function/implementation of the transceiver module 1802 in Figure 18 can be achieved by the transceiver 1905 in the communication device 1900 shown in Figure 19.
作为又一种可能的产品形态,本申请中的第一节点或第二节点可以采用图20所示的组成结构,或者包括图20所示的部件。图20为本申请提供的一种通信装置2000的组成示意图,该通信装置2000可以为终端设备或者终端设备中的芯片或者片上系统;或者,可以为第一节点或第二节点中的模块或芯片或片上系统。As another possible product form, the first node or the second node in this application may adopt the composition structure shown in FIG20, or include the components shown in FIG20. FIG20 is a schematic diagram of the composition of a communication device 2000 provided in this application. The communication device 2000 may be a terminal device or a chip or system-on-a-chip in a terminal device; or, it may be a module, chip or system-on-a-chip in the first node or the second node.
如图20所示,该通信装置2000包括至少一个处理器2001,以及至少一个通信接口(图20中仅是示例性的以包括一个通信接口2004,以及一个处理器2001为例进行说明)。可选的,该通信装置2000还可以包括通信总线2002和存储器2003。As shown in Figure 20, the communication device 2000 includes at least one processor 2001 and at least one communication interface (Figure 20 is merely an example illustrating the inclusion of a communication interface 2004 and a processor 2001). Optionally, the communication device 2000 may also include a communication bus 2002 and a memory 2003.
处理器2001可以是一个通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、通用处理器、网络处理器(network processor,NP)、数字信号处理器(digital signal processing,DSP)、图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU)、人工智能处理器(artificial intelligence processor,AI processor)或神经网络处理器(Neural Processing Unit,NPU)、微处理器、微控制器、可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)或它们的任意组合。处理器2001还可以是其它具有处理功能的装置,例如电路、器件或软件模块,不予限制。Processor 2001 can be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a general-purpose processor, a network processor (NP), a digital signal processor (DSP), a graphics processing unit (GPU), an artificial intelligence processor (AI processor) or a neural processing unit (NPU), a microprocessor, a microcontroller, a programmable logic device (PLD), or any combination thereof. Processor 2001 can also be other devices with processing capabilities, such as circuits, devices, or software modules, without limitation.
通信总线2002用于连接通信装置2000中的不同组件,使得不同组件可以通信。通信总线2002可以是外设部件互连标准(peripheral component interconnect,PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(extended industry standard architecture,EISA)总线等。该总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图20中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。The communication bus 2002 is used to connect different components in the communication device 2000, enabling communication between them. The communication bus 2002 can be a peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus, etc. This bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. For ease of illustration, only one thick line is used in Figure 20, but this does not indicate that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
通信接口2004,用于与其他设备或通信网络通信。示例性的,通信接口2004可以模块、电路、收发器或者任何能够实现通信的装置。可选的,所述通信接口2004也可以是位于处理器2001内的输入输出接口,用以实现处理器的信号输入和信号输出。Communication interface 2004 is used for communicating with other devices or communication networks. For example, communication interface 2004 can be a module, circuit, transceiver, or any device capable of communication. Optionally, communication interface 2004 can also be an input/output interface located within processor 2001, used to implement signal input and signal output for the processor.
存储器2003,可以是具有存储功能的装置,用于存储指令和/或数据。其中,指令可以是计算机程序。Memory 2003 can be a device with storage function for storing instructions and/or data. Instructions can be computer programs.
示例性的,存储器2003可以是高速缓存(cache)、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和/或指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,也可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)或可存储信息和/或指令的其他类型的动态存储设备,还可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或其他磁存储设备等,不予限制。For example, the memory 2003 may be a cache, read-only memory (ROM), or other type of static storage device capable of storing static information and/or instructions; it may also be random access memory (RAM) or other type of dynamic storage device capable of storing information and/or instructions; it may also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM), or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compressed optical discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital universal optical discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media, or other magnetic storage devices, without limitation.
需要指出的是,存储器2003可以独立于处理器2001存在,也可以和处理器2001集成在一起。存储器2003可以位于通信装置2000内,也可以位于通信装置2000外,不予限制。处理器2001,可以用于执行存储器2003中存储的指令,以实现本申请下述实施例提供的方法。It should be noted that the memory 2003 can exist independently of the processor 2001, or it can be integrated with the processor 2001. The memory 2003 can be located inside or outside the communication device 2000, without limitation. The processor 2001 can be used to execute the instructions stored in the memory 2003 to implement the methods provided in the following embodiments of this application.
作为一种可选的实现方式,通信装置2000还可以包括输出设备2005和输入设备2006。输出设备2005和处理器2001通信,可以以多种方式来显示信息。例如,输出设备2005可以是液晶显示器(liquid crystal display,LCD),发光二极管(light emitting diode,LED)显示设备,阴极射线管(cathode ray tube,CRT)显示设备,或投影仪(projector)等。输入设备2006和处理器2001通信,可以以多种方式接收用户的输入。例如,输入设备2006可以是鼠标、键盘、触摸屏设备或传感设备等。As an optional implementation, the communication device 2000 may also include an output device 2005 and an input device 2006. The output device 2005 communicates with the processor 2001 and can display information in various ways. For example, the output device 2005 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light-emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector, etc. The input device 2006 communicates with the processor 2001 and can receive user input in various ways. For example, the input device 2006 may be a mouse, keyboard, touchscreen device, or sensor device, etc.
在一些实施例中,在硬件实现上,本领域的技术人员可以想到上述图18所示的通信装置1800可以采用图20所示的通信装置2000的形式。In some embodiments, those skilled in the art will recognize that the communication device 1800 shown in FIG18 can take the form of the communication device 2000 shown in FIG20 in terms of hardware implementation.
作为一种示例,图18中的处理模块1801的功能/实现过程可以通过图20所示的通信装置2000中的处理器2001调用存储器2003中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。图18中的收发模块1802的功能/实现过程可以通过图20所示的通信装置2000中的通信接口2004来实现。As an example, the function/implementation of the processing module 1801 in Figure 18 can be achieved by the processor 2001 in the communication device 2000 shown in Figure 20 calling computer execution instructions stored in the memory 2003. The function/implementation of the transceiver module 1802 in Figure 18 can be achieved by the communication interface 2004 in the communication device 2000 shown in Figure 20.
需要说明的是,图20所示的结构并不构成对第一节点或第二节点的具体限定。比如,在本申请另一些实施例中,第一节点或第二节点可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It should be noted that the structure shown in Figure 20 does not constitute a specific limitation on the first node or the second node. For example, in other embodiments of this application, the first node or the second node may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine some components, or split some components, or have different component arrangements. The components shown in the figure may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
在一些实施例中,本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括处理器,用于实现上述任一方法实施例中的方法。In some embodiments, this application also provides a communication device, which includes a processor for implementing the methods in any of the above method embodiments.
作为一种可能的实现方式,该通信装置还包括存储器。该存储器,用于保存必要的计算机程序和数据。该计算机程序可以包括指令,处理器可以调用存储器中存储的计算机程序中的指令以指令该通信装置执行上述任一方法实施例中的方法。当然,存储器也可以不在该通信装置中。As one possible implementation, the communication device also includes a memory. This memory stores necessary computer programs and data. The computer program may include instructions, which a processor can invoke to instruct the communication device to execute the methods described in any of the above method embodiments. Alternatively, the memory may not be present in the communication device.
作为另一种可能的实现方式,该通信装置还包括接口电路,该接口电路为代码/数据读写接口电路,该接口电路用于接收计算机执行指令(计算机执行指令存储在存储器中,可能直接从存储器读取,或可能经过其他器件)并传输至该处理器。As another possible implementation, the communication device also includes an interface circuit, which is a code/data read/write interface circuit, used to receive computer execution instructions (which are stored in memory and may be read directly from memory or may be transmitted through other devices) and transmit them to the processor.
作为又一种可能的实现方式,该通信装置还包括通信接口,该通信接口用于与该通信装置之外的模块通信。As another possible implementation, the communication device also includes a communication interface for communicating with modules outside the communication device.
可以理解的是,该通信装置可以是芯片或芯片系统,该通信装置是芯片系统时,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It is understood that the communication device can be a chip or a chip system. When the communication device is a chip system, it can be composed of chips or may include chips and other discrete devices. This application does not specifically limit this.
本申请还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序或指令,该计算机程序或指令被计算机执行时实现上述任一方法实施例的功能。This application also provides a computer-readable storage medium having a computer program or instructions stored thereon, which, when executed by a computer, implements the functions of any of the above-described method embodiments.
本申请还提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现上述任一方法实施例的功能。This application also provides a computer program product that, when executed by a computer, implements the functions of any of the above method embodiments.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art will understand that, for the sake of convenience and brevity, the specific working processes of the systems, devices, and units described above can be referred to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
可以理解,本申请中描述的系统、装置和方法也可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。It is understood that the systems, apparatuses, and methods described in this application can also be implemented in other ways. For example, the apparatus embodiments described above are merely illustrative. For instance, the division of units is only a logical functional division, and in actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored or not executed. Furthermore, the couplings or direct couplings or communication connections shown or discussed may be through some interfaces; indirect couplings or communication connections between devices or units may be electrical, mechanical, or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate; that is, they may be located in one place or distributed across multiple network units. The components shown as units may or may not be physical units. Some or all of the units can be selected to achieve the purpose of this embodiment according to actual needs.
另外,本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in the various embodiments of this application can be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit can exist physically separately, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件程序实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式来实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或者数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可以用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带),光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state drive,SSD))等。本申请实施例中,计算机可以包括前面所述的装置。In the above embodiments, implementation can be achieved, in whole or in part, through software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using software programs, implementation can be, in whole or in part, in the form of a computer program product. This computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of this application are generated. The computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another. For example, the computer instructions can be transmitted from one website, computer, server, or data center to another website, computer, server, or data center via wired (e.g., coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium accessible to a computer or a data storage device containing one or more servers, data centers, etc., that can be integrated with the medium. The available medium can be a magnetic medium (e.g., floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), an optical medium (e.g., DVD), or a semiconductor medium (e.g., solid-state drive (SSD)). In this embodiment, the computer may include the aforementioned apparatus.
尽管在此结合各实施例对本申请进行了描述,然而,在实施所要求保护的本申请过程中,本领域技术人员通过查看所述附图、公开内容、以及所附权利要求书,可理解并实现所述公开实施例的其他变化。在权利要求中,“包括”(comprising)一词不排除其他组成部分或步骤,“一”或“一个”不排除多个的情况。单个处理器或其他单元可以实现权利要求中列举的若干项功能。相互不同的从属权利要求中记载了某些措施,但这并不表示这些措施不能组合起来产生良好的效果。Although this application has been described herein in conjunction with various embodiments, those skilled in the art, by reviewing the accompanying drawings, disclosure, and appended claims, will understand and implement other variations of the disclosed embodiments in carrying out the claimed application. In the claims, the word "comprising" does not exclude other components or steps, and "a" or "an" does not exclude a plurality. A single processor or other unit can implement several functions listed in the claims. While different dependent claims may recite certain measures, this does not mean that these measures cannot be combined to produce good results.
尽管结合具体特征及其实施例对本申请进行了描述,显而易见的,在不脱离本申请的范围的情况下,可对其进行各种修改和组合。相应地,本说明书和附图仅仅是所附权利要求所界定的本申请的示例性说明,且视为已覆盖本申请范围内的任意和所有修改、变化、组合或等同物。显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Although this application has been described in conjunction with specific features and embodiments, it is obvious that various modifications and combinations can be made thereto without departing from the scope of this application. Accordingly, this specification and drawings are merely illustrative descriptions of the application as defined by the appended claims, and are considered to cover any and all modifications, variations, combinations, or equivalents within the scope of this application. Clearly, those skilled in the art can make various alterations and modifications to this application without departing from its scope. Thus, if such modifications and modifications fall within the scope of the claims and their equivalents, this application is also intended to include such modifications and modifications.
Claims (29)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN202410537870.6 | 2024-04-29 | ||
| CN202410537870.6A CN120881676A (en) | 2024-04-29 | 2024-04-29 | Communication method and device |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025228175A1 true WO2025228175A1 (en) | 2025-11-06 |
Family
ID=97454660
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2025/090204 Pending WO2025228175A1 (en) | 2024-04-29 | 2025-04-21 | Communication method and apparatus |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN120881676A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2025228175A1 (en) |
-
2024
- 2024-04-29 CN CN202410537870.6A patent/CN120881676A/en active Pending
-
2025
- 2025-04-21 WO PCT/CN2025/090204 patent/WO2025228175A1/en active Pending
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN120881676A (en) | 2025-10-31 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US11470547B2 (en) | Access selection method and apparatus | |
| WO2022078176A1 (en) | Bandwidth part switching method, apparatus and system | |
| US20240314882A1 (en) | Communication method, terminal device, and network device | |
| WO2024198946A1 (en) | Network access method, apparatus and system | |
| US20250203473A1 (en) | Handover method and communication apparatus | |
| CN116264701A (en) | Communication method and device | |
| WO2025016213A1 (en) | Handover method and communication apparatus | |
| CN118784403A (en) | Communication method, device and computer readable storage medium | |
| WO2025228175A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| JP7648058B2 (en) | Network node, base station and communication method | |
| WO2025228091A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| CN118660322B (en) | Wireless communication method and communication device | |
| WO2025213968A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus, storage medium, and computer program product | |
| WO2025059995A1 (en) | Communication method, and apparatus | |
| CN119383683A (en) | Communication method and device | |
| WO2024114794A1 (en) | Random access resource determination method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2025223019A1 (en) | Communication method and device, storage medium, and computer program product | |
| KR20250134688A (en) | Uplink multi-transmit/receive point time division multiplexing operation of a single active radio frequency chain user equipment | |
| CN120835310A (en) | Communication method and related device | |
| WO2025223020A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatuses, storage medium, and computer program product | |
| WO2025025144A1 (en) | Communication method and related device | |
| WO2025087325A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| GB2636156A (en) | Method for enhanced measurement and reporting | |
| CN120711468A (en) | Switching method and device | |
| WO2024037178A1 (en) | Communication method and communication apparatus |